Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
      2 /Volumes/project-jingyu/android_toolchain/build/../binutils/binutils-2.19/ld/ld.texinfo.
      3 
      4 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      5 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      6 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      7 
      8    This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.19.
      9 
     10    Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
     11 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     12 
     13    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
     14 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
     15 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
     16 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
     17 Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
     18 Free Documentation License".
     19 
     20 
     21 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     22 
     23 LD
     24 **
     25 
     26 This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.19.
     27 
     28    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     29 Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
     30 section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     31 
     32 * Menu:
     33 
     34 * Overview::                    Overview
     35 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     36 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     37 
     38 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     39 
     40 * BFD::                         BFD
     41 
     42 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     43 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     44 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     45 * LD Index::                       LD Index
     46 
     47 
     48 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     49 
     50 1 Overview
     51 **********
     52 
     53 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     54 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     55 a program is to run `ld'.
     56 
     57    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     58 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     59 total control over the linking process.
     60 
     61    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     62 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     63 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     64 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     65 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     66 
     67    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     68 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     69 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     70 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     71 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     72 
     73 
     74 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     75 
     76 2 Invocation
     77 ************
     78 
     79 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     80 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     81 have many choices to control its behavior.
     82 
     83 * Menu:
     84 
     85 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     86 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     87 
     88 
     89 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     90 
     91 2.1 Command Line Options
     92 ========================
     93 
     94    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     95 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     96 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     97 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     98 `hello.o':
     99 
    100      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
    101 
    102    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
    103 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
    104 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
    105 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
    106 
    107    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    108 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    109 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    110 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    111 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    112 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    113 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    114 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    115 noted in the descriptions below.
    116 
    117    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    118 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    119 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    120 placed between an option and its argument.
    121 
    122    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    123 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    124 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    125 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    126 message `No input files'.
    127 
    128    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    129 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    130 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    131 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    132 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    133 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    134 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
    135 way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
    136 placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
    137 default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
    138 command.  *Note Scripts::.
    139 
    140    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    141 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    142 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    143 requires them.
    144 
    145    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    146 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    147 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    148 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    149 only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    150 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    151 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    152 
    153    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    154 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    155 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    156 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    157 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    158 
    159    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    160 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    161 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    162 compiler driver) like this:
    163 
    164        gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
    165 
    166    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    167 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
    168 
    169    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    170 GNU linker:
    171 
    172 `@FILE'
    173      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    174      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    175      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    176      literally, and not removed.
    177 
    178      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    179      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    180      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    181      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    182      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    183      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    184      recursively.
    185 
    186 `-aKEYWORD'
    187      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    188      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    189      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    190      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    191      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    192 
    193 `-AARCHITECTURE'
    194 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    195      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    196      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    197      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    198      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    199      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    200      i960, for details.
    201 
    202      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    203      other architecture families.
    204 
    205 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    206 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    207      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    208      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    209      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    210      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    211      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    212      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    213      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    214      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    215      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    216      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    217 
    218      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    219      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    220      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    221      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    222      particular format.
    223 
    224      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    225      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    226      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    227      Commands::.
    228 
    229 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    230 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    231      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    232      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    233      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    234      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    235      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    236      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    237      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    238 
    239 `-d'
    240 `-dc'
    241 `-dp'
    242      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    243      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    244      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    245      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    246      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    247 
    248 `-e ENTRY'
    249 `--entry=ENTRY'
    250      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    251      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    252      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    253      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    254      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    255      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    256      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    257 
    258 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    259      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    260      not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
    261      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    262      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    263      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    264      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    265      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    266      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    267      option will be treated as hidden.
    268 
    269 `-E'
    270 `--export-dynamic'
    271      When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
    272      the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
    273      symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
    274 
    275      If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
    276      normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
    277      dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    278 
    279      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    280      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    281      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    282      linking the program itself.
    283 
    284      You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
    285      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    286      it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
    287 
    288 `-EB'
    289      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    290 
    291 `-EL'
    292      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    293      format.
    294 
    295 `-f'
    296 `--auxiliary NAME'
    297      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    298      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    299      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    300      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    301 
    302      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    303      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    304      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    305      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    306      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    307      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    308      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    309      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    310      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    311 
    312      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    313      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    314      command line.
    315 
    316 `-F NAME'
    317 `--filter NAME'
    318      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    319      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    320      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    321      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    322      object NAME.
    323 
    324      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    325      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    326      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    327      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    328      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    329      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    330      provided by the object NAME.
    331 
    332      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    333      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    334      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    335      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    336      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    337      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    338      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    339 
    340 `-fini NAME'
    341      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    342      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    343      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    344      as the function to call.
    345 
    346 `-g'
    347      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    348 
    349 `-GVALUE'
    350 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    351      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    352      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    353      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    354      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    355      formats.
    356 
    357 `-hNAME'
    358 `-soname=NAME'
    359      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    360      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    361      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    362      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    363      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    364      using the file name given to the linker.
    365 
    366 `-i'
    367      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    368 
    369 `-init NAME'
    370      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    371      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    372      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    373      as the function to call.
    374 
    375 `-lNAMESPEC'
    376 `--library=NAMESPEC'
    377      Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
    378      of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
    379      If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
    380      library path for a file called FILENAME, otherise it will search
    381      the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    382 
    383      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    384      files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
    385      systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
    386      `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    387      (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
    388      Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
    389      always specifies a file called FILENAME.
    390 
    391      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    392      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    393      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    394      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    395      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    396      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    397      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    398 
    399      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    400      archives multiple times.
    401 
    402      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    403 
    404      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    405      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    406      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    407 
    408 `-LSEARCHDIR'
    409 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    410      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    411      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    412      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    413      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    414      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    415      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    416      regardless of the order in which the options appear.
    417 
    418      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    419      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    420 
    421      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    422      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    423      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    424 
    425      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    426      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    427      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    428      line.
    429 
    430 `-mEMULATION'
    431      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    432      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    433 
    434      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    435      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    436 
    437      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    438      configured.
    439 
    440 `-M'
    441 `--print-map'
    442      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    443      information about the link, including the following:
    444 
    445         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    446 
    447         * How common symbols are allocated.
    448 
    449         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    450           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    451 
    452         * The values assigned to symbols.
    453 
    454           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    455           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    456           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    457           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    458           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    459           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    460           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    461           script containing:
    462 
    463                   foo = 1
    464                   foo = foo * 4
    465                   foo = foo + 8
    466 
    467           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    468           option is used:
    469 
    470                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    471                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    472                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    473 
    474           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    475           expressions in linker scripts.
    476 
    477 `-n'
    478 `--nmagic'
    479      Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
    480      `NMAGIC' if possible.
    481 
    482 `-N'
    483 `--omagic'
    484      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    485      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    486      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    487      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    488      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    489      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    490 
    491 `--no-omagic'
    492      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    493      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    494      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    495      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    496 
    497 `-o OUTPUT'
    498 `--output=OUTPUT'
    499      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    500      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    501      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    502 
    503 `-O LEVEL'
    504      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    505      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    506      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
    507      moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
    508      Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
    509      Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
    510      for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
    511      change with future releases.
    512 
    513 `-q'
    514 `--emit-relocs'
    515      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
    516      Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
    517      information in order to perform correct modifications of
    518      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    519 
    520      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    521 
    522 `--force-dynamic'
    523      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    524      specific to VxWorks targets.
    525 
    526 `-r'
    527 `--relocatable'
    528      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    529      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    530      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    531      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    532      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    533      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    534      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    535 
    536      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    537      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    538      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    539      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    540      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    541      all.
    542 
    543      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    544 
    545 `-R FILENAME'
    546 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    547      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    548      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    549      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    550      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    551 
    552      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    553      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    554      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    555 
    556 `-s'
    557 `--strip-all'
    558      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    559 
    560 `-S'
    561 `--strip-debug'
    562      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    563      output file.
    564 
    565 `-t'
    566 `--trace'
    567      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    568 
    569 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    570 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    571      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    572      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    573      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    574      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    575      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    576      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    577 
    578 `-dT SCRIPTFILE'
    579 `--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
    580      Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
    581 
    582      This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
    583      processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
    584      command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
    585      the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
    586      behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
    587      linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
    588      (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
    589      such as `gcc').
    590 
    591 `-u SYMBOL'
    592 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    593      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    594      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    595      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    596      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    597      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    598 
    599 `-Ur'
    600      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    601      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    602      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    603      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    604      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    605      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    606      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    607      for the others.
    608 
    609 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    610      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    611      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    612      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    613      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    614      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    615      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    616      section assignments in a linker script.
    617 
    618 `-v'
    619 `--version'
    620 `-V'
    621      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    622      the supported emulations.
    623 
    624 `-x'
    625 `--discard-all'
    626      Delete all local symbols.
    627 
    628 `-X'
    629 `--discard-locals'
    630      Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
    631      system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
    632      systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
    633 
    634 `-y SYMBOL'
    635 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    636      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    637      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    638      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    639 
    640      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    641      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    642 
    643 `-Y PATH'
    644      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    645      for Solaris compatibility.
    646 
    647 `-z KEYWORD'
    648      The recognized keywords are:
    649     `combreloc'
    650           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    651           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    652 
    653     `defs'
    654           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    655           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    656 
    657     `execstack'
    658           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    659 
    660     `initfirst'
    661           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    662           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    663           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    664           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    665           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    666           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    667 
    668     `interpose'
    669           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    670           symbols but the primary executable.
    671 
    672     `lazy'
    673           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    674           tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
    675           the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
    676           than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
    677 
    678     `loadfltr'
    679           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    680           runtime.
    681 
    682     `muldefs'
    683           Allows multiple definitions.
    684 
    685     `nocombreloc'
    686           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    687 
    688     `nocopyreloc'
    689           Disables production of copy relocs.
    690 
    691     `nodefaultlib'
    692           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    693           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    694 
    695     `nodelete'
    696           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    697 
    698     `nodlopen'
    699           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    700 
    701     `nodump'
    702           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    703 
    704     `noexecstack'
    705           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    706 
    707     `norelro'
    708           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    709           object.
    710 
    711     `now'
    712           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    713           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    714           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    715           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    716           to the point when the function is first called.
    717 
    718     `origin'
    719           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    720 
    721     `relro'
    722           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    723 
    724     `max-page-size=VALUE'
    725           Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
    726 
    727     `common-page-size=VALUE'
    728           Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
    729 
    730 
    731      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    732 
    733 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    734 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    735      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    736      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    737 
    738      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    739      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    740      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    741      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    742      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    743      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    744      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    745      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    746 
    747      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    748      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    749      between two or more archives.
    750 
    751 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    752 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    753      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    754      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    755      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    756      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    757      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    758      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    759      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    760 
    761 `--as-needed'
    762 `--no-as-needed'
    763      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    764      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    765      Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    766      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    767      library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags
    768      to only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol
    769      reference from regular objects which is undefined at the point
    770      that the library was linked.  `--no-as-needed' restores the
    771      default behaviour.
    772 
    773 `--add-needed'
    774 `--no-add-needed'
    775      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
    776      DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
    777      after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
    778      a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
    779      `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
    780      those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
    781      default behaviour.
    782 
    783 `-assert KEYWORD'
    784      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    785 
    786 `-Bdynamic'
    787 `-dy'
    788 `-call_shared'
    789      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    790      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    791      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    792      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    793      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    794      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    795 
    796 `-Bgroup'
    797      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    798      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    799      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    800      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    801      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    802 
    803 `-Bstatic'
    804 `-dn'
    805 `-non_shared'
    806 `-static'
    807      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    808      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    809      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    810      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    811      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    812      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    813      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    814      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    815      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    816      static libraries.
    817 
    818 `-Bsymbolic'
    819      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    820      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    821      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    822      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    823      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    824 
    825 `-Bsymbolic-functions'
    826      When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
    827      symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
    828      option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
    829      libraries.
    830 
    831 `--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
    832      Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
    833      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
    834      global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
    835      definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
    836      linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
    837      added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
    838      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    839 
    840      The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
    841      without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
    842      information.
    843 
    844 `--dynamic-list-data'
    845      Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
    846 
    847 `--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
    848      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
    849      It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
    850 
    851 `--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
    852      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
    853      identification.
    854 
    855 `--check-sections'
    856 `--no-check-sections'
    857      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    858      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    859      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    860      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    861      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    862      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    863      `--check-sections'.
    864 
    865 `--cref'
    866      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    867      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    868      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    869 
    870      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    871      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    872      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    873      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    874      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    875      references to the symbol.
    876 
    877 `--no-define-common'
    878      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    879      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    880      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    881 
    882      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    883      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    884      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    885      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    886      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    887      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    888      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    889      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    890      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    891      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    892 
    893 `--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    894      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    895      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    896      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    897      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    898      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    899      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    900      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    901      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    902      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    903      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    904      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    905 
    906 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    907 `--no-demangle'
    908      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    909      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    910      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    911      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    912      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    913      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    914      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    915      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    916      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    917      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    918 
    919 `--dynamic-linker FILE'
    920      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    921      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    922      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    923      you are doing.
    924 
    925 `--fatal-warnings'
    926 `--no-fatal-warnings'
    927      Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
    928      restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
    929 
    930 `--force-exe-suffix'
    931      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
    932 
    933      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
    934      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
    935      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
    936      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
    937      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
    938      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
    939 
    940 `--gc-sections'
    941 `--no-gc-sections'
    942      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
    943      on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
    944      (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
    945      specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
    946 
    947      `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
    948      symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
    949      and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
    950      will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
    951      dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
    952      linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
    953      this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
    954      recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
    955      relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
    956 
    957      This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
    958      option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
    959      explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
    960      option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
    961 
    962 `--print-gc-sections'
    963 `--no-print-gc-sections'
    964      List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
    965      printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
    966      collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
    967      default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
    968      can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
    969      command line.
    970 
    971 `--help'
    972      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
    973      and exit.
    974 
    975 `--target-help'
    976      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
    977      output and exit.
    978 
    979 `-Map MAPFILE'
    980      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
    981      `-M' option, above.
    982 
    983 `--no-keep-memory'
    984      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
    985      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
    986      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
    987      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
    988      space while linking a large executable.
    989 
    990 `--no-undefined'
    991 `-z defs'
    992      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
    993      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
    994      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
    995      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
    996      libraries being linked in.
    997 
    998 `--allow-multiple-definition'
    999 `-z muldefs'
   1000      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
   1001      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
   1002      the first definition will be used.
   1003 
   1004 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
   1005 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
   1006      Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
   1007      libraries.  This switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that
   1008      it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
   1009      shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
   1010      affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
   1011 
   1012      The reason that `--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
   1013      the shared library being specified at link time may not be the
   1014      same as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols
   1015      might actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some
   1016      systems, (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is
   1017      normal.  (The kernel patches them at load time to select which
   1018      function is most appropriate for the current architecture.  This
   1019      is used for example to dynamically select an appropriate memset
   1020      function).  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries
   1021      to have undefined symbols.
   1022 
   1023 `--no-undefined-version'
   1024      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
   1025      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
   1026      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
   1027 
   1028 `--default-symver'
   1029      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1030      unversioned exported symbols.
   1031 
   1032 `--default-imported-symver'
   1033      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1034      unversioned imported symbols.
   1035 
   1036 `--no-warn-mismatch'
   1037      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
   1038      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
   1039      have been compiled for different processors or for different
   1040      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
   1041      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
   1042      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
   1043      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
   1044 
   1045 `--no-warn-search-mismatch'
   1046      Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
   1047      library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
   1048 
   1049 `--no-whole-archive'
   1050      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
   1051      archive files.
   1052 
   1053 `--noinhibit-exec'
   1054      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
   1055      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
   1056      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
   1057      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
   1058 
   1059 `-nostdlib'
   1060      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
   1061      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
   1062      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
   1063      ignored.
   1064 
   1065 `--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   1066      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
   1067      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
   1068      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
   1069      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
   1070      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
   1071      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
   1072      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
   1073      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
   1074      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
   1075      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
   1076      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
   1077 
   1078 `-pie'
   1079 `--pic-executable'
   1080      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
   1081      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
   1082      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
   1083      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
   1084      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
   1085      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
   1086      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
   1087 
   1088 `-qmagic'
   1089      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
   1090 
   1091 `-Qy'
   1092      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
   1093 
   1094 `--relax'
   1095      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
   1096      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
   1097      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
   1098      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
   1099      M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
   1100      PowerPC ELF32.
   1101 
   1102      On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
   1103      optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1104      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
   1105      synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
   1106 
   1107      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1108      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1109      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1110      family of processors.
   1111 
   1112      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1113      but ignored.
   1114 
   1115 `--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
   1116      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1117      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1118      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1119      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1120      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1121 
   1122      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1123      symbols needed for relocations.
   1124 
   1125      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1126      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1127 
   1128 `-rpath DIR'
   1129      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1130      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1131      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1132      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1133      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1134      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1135      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1136      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1137      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1138 
   1139      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1140      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1141      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1142      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1143      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1144      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
   1145      systems.
   1146 
   1147      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1148      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1149      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1150 
   1151 `-rpath-link DIR'
   1152      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1153      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1154      as one of the input files.
   1155 
   1156      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1157      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1158      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1159      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1160      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1161      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1162      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1163      appearing multiple times.
   1164 
   1165      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1166      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1167      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1168      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1169 
   1170      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1171      shared libraries:
   1172        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1173 
   1174        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1175           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1176           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1177           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1178           effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
   1179           only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
   1180           been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
   1181 
   1182        3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
   1183           `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
   1184           the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
   1185 
   1186        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1187           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1188 
   1189        5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
   1190           environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1191 
   1192        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1193           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1194           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1195           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1196 
   1197        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1198 
   1199        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1200           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1201           that file.
   1202 
   1203      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1204      a warning and continue with the link.
   1205 
   1206 `-shared'
   1207 `-Bshareable'
   1208      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1209      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1210      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1211      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1212 
   1213 `--sort-common [= ascending | descending]'
   1214      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
   1215      ascending or descending order when it places them in the
   1216      appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
   1217      sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
   1218      one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
   1219      constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
   1220      order is assumed.
   1221 
   1222 `--sort-section name'
   1223      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1224      patterns in the linker script.
   1225 
   1226 `--sort-section alignment'
   1227      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1228      patterns in the linker script.
   1229 
   1230 `--split-by-file [SIZE]'
   1231      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1232      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1233      1 if not given.
   1234 
   1235 `--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
   1236      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1237      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1238      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1239      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1240      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1241      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1242      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1243      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1244      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1245      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1246      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1247 
   1248 `--stats'
   1249      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1250      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1251 
   1252 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1253      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1254      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1255      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1256 
   1257 `--traditional-format'
   1258      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1259      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1260      use the traditional format instead.
   1261 
   1262      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1263      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1264      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1265      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1266      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1267      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1268 
   1269 `--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1270      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1271      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1272      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1273      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1274      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1275      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1276      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1277 
   1278 `-Tbss ORG'
   1279 `-Tdata ORG'
   1280 `-Ttext ORG'
   1281      Same as -section-start, with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1282      SECTIONNAME.
   1283 
   1284 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1285      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1286      possible values for `method':
   1287 
   1288     `ignore-all'
   1289           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1290 
   1291     `report-all'
   1292           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1293 
   1294     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1295           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1296           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1297           files.
   1298 
   1299     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1300           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1301           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1302           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1303           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1304           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1305 
   1306      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1307      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1308 
   1309      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1310      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1311      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1312 
   1313 `--dll-verbose'
   1314 `--verbose'
   1315      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1316      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1317      Display the linker script being used by the linker.
   1318 
   1319 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1320      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1321      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1322      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1323      being created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
   1324      which support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
   1325 
   1326 `--warn-common'
   1327      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1328      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1329      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1330      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1331      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1332      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1333      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1334 
   1335      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1336      examples:
   1337 
   1338     `int i = 1;'
   1339           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1340           the output file.
   1341 
   1342     `extern int i;'
   1343           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1344           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1345           variable somewhere.
   1346 
   1347     `int i;'
   1348           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1349           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1350           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1351           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1352           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1353           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1354           a definition of the same variable.
   1355 
   1356      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1357      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1358      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1359      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1360      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1361 
   1362        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1363           already a definition for the symbol.
   1364                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1365                   overridden by definition
   1366                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1367 
   1368        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1369           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1370           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1371           in a different order.
   1372                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1373                   overriding common
   1374                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1375 
   1376        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1377           symbol.
   1378                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1379                   of `SYMBOL'
   1380                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1381 
   1382        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1383                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1384                   overridden by larger common
   1385                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1386 
   1387        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1388           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1389           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1390                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1391                   overriding smaller common
   1392                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1393 
   1394 `--warn-constructors'
   1395      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1396      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1397      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1398 
   1399 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1400      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1401      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1402      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1403      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1404      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1405      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1406      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1407      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1408      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1409      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1410      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1411      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1412 
   1413 `--warn-once'
   1414      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1415      module which refers to it.
   1416 
   1417 `--warn-section-align'
   1418      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1419      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1420      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1421      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1422      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1423 
   1424 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1425      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1426 
   1427 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1428      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1429      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1430      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1431 
   1432 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1433      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1434      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1435 
   1436 `--whole-archive'
   1437      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1438      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1439      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1440      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1441      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1442      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1443 
   1444      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1445      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1446      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1447      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1448      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1449 
   1450 `--wrap SYMBOL'
   1451      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1452      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1453      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1454 
   1455      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1456      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1457      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1458 
   1459      Here is a trivial example:
   1460 
   1461           void *
   1462           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1463           {
   1464             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1465             return __real_malloc (c);
   1466           }
   1467 
   1468      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1469      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1470      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1471      the real `malloc' function.
   1472 
   1473      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1474      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1475      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1476      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1477      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1478 
   1479 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1480      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1481      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1482 
   1483 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1484 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1485      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1486      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1487      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1488      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1489      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1490      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1491 
   1492 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1493      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1494      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1495      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1496      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1497      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1498      speed.
   1499 
   1500 `--hash-style=STYLE'
   1501      Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
   1502      `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
   1503      `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
   1504      new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
   1505 
   1506 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1507      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1508      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1509      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1510      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1511 
   1512      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1513      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1514      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1515      switch has been used.
   1516 
   1517      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1518      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1519 
   1520 `--build-id'
   1521 `--build-id=STYLE'
   1522      Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
   1523      contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
   1524      STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
   1525      160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
   1526      `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
   1527      output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
   1528      specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
   1529      characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
   1530      `sha1' is used.
   1531 
   1532      The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
   1533      the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
   1534      nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
   1535      checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
   1536      later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
   1537      original linked file does not change.
   1538 
   1539      Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
   1540      `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
   1541 
   1542 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1543 -----------------------------------------
   1544 
   1545 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1546 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1547 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1548 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1549 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1550 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1551 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1552 
   1553    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1554 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1555 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1556 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1557 
   1558 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1559      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1560      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1561      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1562 
   1563 `--base-file FILE'
   1564      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1565      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1566      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1567 
   1568 `--dll'
   1569      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1570      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1571      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1572 
   1573 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1574 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1575      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1576      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1577      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1578      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1579      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1580      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1581      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1582      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1583      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1584      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1585      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1586      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1587      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1588      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1589      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1590 
   1591 `--export-all-symbols'
   1592      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1593      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1594      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1595      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1596      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1597      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1598      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1599      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1600      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1601      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1602      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1603      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1604      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1605      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1606      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1607      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1608      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1609      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1610      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1611      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1612      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1613      of the linker]
   1614 
   1615 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1616      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1617      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1618      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1619      linker]
   1620 
   1621 `--file-alignment'
   1622      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1623      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1624      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1625      port of the linker]
   1626 
   1627 `--heap RESERVE'
   1628 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1629      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1630      commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
   1631      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1632      targeted port of the linker]
   1633 
   1634 `--image-base VALUE'
   1635      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1636      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1637      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1638      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1639      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1640      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1641      targeted port of the linker]
   1642 
   1643 `--kill-at'
   1644      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1645      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1646      targeted port of the linker]
   1647 
   1648 `--large-address-aware'
   1649      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
   1650      the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1651      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1652      in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1653      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1654      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1655      ports of the linker]
   1656 
   1657 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1658      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1659      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1660      linker]
   1661 
   1662 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1663      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1664      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1665 
   1666 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1667      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1668      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1669      linker]
   1670 
   1671 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1672      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1673      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1674      linker]
   1675 
   1676 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1677      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1678      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1679 
   1680 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1681      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1682      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1683      linker]
   1684 
   1685 `--output-def FILE'
   1686      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1687      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1688      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1689      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1690      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1691      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1692 
   1693 `--out-implib FILE'
   1694      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1695      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1696      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1697      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1698      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1699      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1700      linker]
   1701 
   1702 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1703      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1704      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1705      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1706      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1707      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1708      targeted port of the linker]
   1709 
   1710 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1711      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1712      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1713      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1714      the linker]
   1715 
   1716 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1717      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1718      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1719      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1720      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1721      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1722      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1723      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1724 
   1725 `--enable-auto-import'
   1726      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1727      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1728      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1729      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1730      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1731      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1732 
   1733      Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
   1734      data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
   1735      placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
   1736      around a problem with consts that is described here:
   1737      http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
   1738 
   1739      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1740      may see this message:
   1741 
   1742      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1743      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1744 
   1745      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1746      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1747      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1748      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1749      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1750      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1751      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1752      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1753      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1754 
   1755      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1756      the data type of the exported variable:
   1757 
   1758      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1759      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1760      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1761      supports this feature.
   1762 
   1763      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1764      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1765      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1766      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1767      variable.  Thus:
   1768 
   1769           extern type extern_array[];
   1770           extern_array[1] -->
   1771              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1772 
   1773      or
   1774 
   1775           extern type extern_array[];
   1776           extern_array[1] -->
   1777              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1778 
   1779      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1780      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1781      variable:
   1782 
   1783           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1784           extern_struct.field -->
   1785              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1786 
   1787      or
   1788 
   1789           extern long long extern_ll;
   1790           extern_ll -->
   1791             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1792 
   1793      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1794      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1795      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1796      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1797      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1798      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1799      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1800      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1801      usage:
   1802 
   1803      Original:
   1804           --foo.h
   1805           extern int arr[];
   1806           --foo.c
   1807           #include "foo.h"
   1808           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1809             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1810           }
   1811 
   1812      Solution 1:
   1813           --foo.h
   1814           extern int arr[];
   1815           --foo.c
   1816           #include "foo.h"
   1817           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1818             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1819             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1820             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1821           }
   1822 
   1823      Solution 2:
   1824           --foo.h
   1825           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1826           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1827             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1828           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1829           #else
   1830           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1831           #endif
   1832           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1833           --foo.c
   1834           #include "foo.h"
   1835           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1836             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1837           }
   1838 
   1839      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1840      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1841      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1842      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1843      of the linker]
   1844 
   1845 `--disable-auto-import'
   1846      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1847      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1848      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1849 
   1850 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1851      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1852      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1853      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   1854      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   1855      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1856      targeted port of the linker]
   1857 
   1858 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1859      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   1860      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   1861      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1862 
   1863 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   1864      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   1865      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1866      linker]
   1867 
   1868 `--section-alignment'
   1869      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   1870      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   1871      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1872      the linker]
   1873 
   1874 `--stack RESERVE'
   1875 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1876      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1877      commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
   1878      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1879      targeted port of the linker]
   1880 
   1881 `--subsystem WHICH'
   1882 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   1883 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   1884      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   1885      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   1886      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   1887      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   1888      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1889 
   1890 
   1891 2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
   1892 ------------------------------------------------------------
   1893 
   1894 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
   1895 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
   1896 
   1897 `--no-trampoline'
   1898      This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
   1899      trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
   1900      using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
   1901      function is taken).
   1902 
   1903 `--bank-window NAME'
   1904      This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
   1905      in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
   1906      window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
   1907      to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
   1908 
   1909 
   1910 2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
   1911 ---------------------------------------------
   1912 
   1913 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
   1914 generation when linking for 68K targets.
   1915 
   1916 `--got=TYPE'
   1917      This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
   1918      TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
   1919      `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
   1920 
   1921 
   1922 
   1923 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   1924 
   1925 2.2 Environment Variables
   1926 =========================
   1927 
   1928 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   1929 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   1930 
   1931    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   1932 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   1933 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   1934 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   1935 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   1936 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   1937 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   1938 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   1939 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   1940 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   1941 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   1942 
   1943    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   1944 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   1945 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   1946 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   1947 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   1948 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   1949 configured.
   1950 
   1951    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   1952 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   1953 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   1954 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   1955 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   1956 
   1957 
   1958 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   1959 
   1960 3 Linker Scripts
   1961 ****************
   1962 
   1963 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   1964 in the linker command language.
   1965 
   1966    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   1967 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   1968 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   1969 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   1970 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   1971 commands described below.
   1972 
   1973    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   1974 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   1975 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   1976 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   1977 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   1978 
   1979    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   1980 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   1981 linker script.
   1982 
   1983    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   1984 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   1985 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   1986 
   1987 * Menu:
   1988 
   1989 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1990 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   1991 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   1992 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   1993 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   1994 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   1995 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   1996 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   1997 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   1998 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   1999 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   2000 
   2001 
   2002 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2003 
   2004 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2005 ================================
   2006 
   2007 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   2008 describe the linker script language.
   2009 
   2010    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   2011 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   2012 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   2013 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   2014 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   2015 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   2016 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   2017 file is an "output section".
   2018 
   2019    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   2020 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   2021 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   2022 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   2023 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   2024 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   2025 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   2026 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   2027 debugging information.
   2028 
   2029    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   2030 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   2031 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   2032 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   2033 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   2034 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   2035 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   2036 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   2037 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   2038 RAM address would be the VMA.
   2039 
   2040    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   2041 program with the `-h' option.
   2042 
   2043    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   2044 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   2045 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   2046 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   2047 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   2048 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   2049 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   2050 
   2051    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   2052 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   2053 
   2054 
   2055 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   2056 
   2057 3.2 Linker Script Format
   2058 ========================
   2059 
   2060 Linker scripts are text files.
   2061 
   2062    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   2063 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   2064 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   2065 generally ignored.
   2066 
   2067    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   2068 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   2069 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   2070 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   2071 file name.
   2072 
   2073    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   2074 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   2075 whitespace.
   2076 
   2077 
   2078 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2079 
   2080 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   2081 ================================
   2082 
   2083 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   2084 
   2085    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   2086 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   2087 layout of the output file.
   2088 
   2089    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   2090 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   2091 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   2092 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   2093 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   2094 files.
   2095 
   2096    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   2097 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   2098 linker script which will do that:
   2099      SECTIONS
   2100      {
   2101        . = 0x10000;
   2102        .text : { *(.text) }
   2103        . = 0x8000000;
   2104        .data : { *(.data) }
   2105        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2106      }
   2107 
   2108    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   2109 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   2110 enclosed in curly braces.
   2111 
   2112    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   2113 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   2114 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   2115 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   2116 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   2117 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   2118 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   2119 
   2120    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   2121 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   2122 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   2123 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   2124 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   2125 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   2126 
   2127    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   2128 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   2129 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   2130 
   2131    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   2132 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   2133 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   2134 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   2135 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   2136 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   2137 section in memory.
   2138 
   2139    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   2140 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   2141 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   2142 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   2143 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   2144 
   2145    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   2146 
   2147 
   2148 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   2149 
   2150 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   2151 =================================
   2152 
   2153 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   2154 
   2155 * Menu:
   2156 
   2157 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   2158 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   2159 
   2160 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   2161 
   2162 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   2163 
   2164 
   2165 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2166 
   2167 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   2168 -----------------------------
   2169 
   2170 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2171 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2172 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2173      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2174 
   2175    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2176 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2177 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2178    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2179 
   2180    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2181 
   2182    * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
   2183 
   2184    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2185 
   2186    * The address `0'.
   2187 
   2188 
   2189 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2190 
   2191 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2192 ---------------------------------
   2193 
   2194 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2195 
   2196 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2197      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2198      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2199      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2200      up to 10 levels deep.
   2201 
   2202      You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
   2203      `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
   2204 
   2205 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2206 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2207      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2208      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2209 
   2210      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2211      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2212      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2213 
   2214      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2215      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2216      option.
   2217 
   2218      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2219      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2220      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2221      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2222      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2223      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2224      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2225 
   2226      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2227      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2228 
   2229      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2230      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2231      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2232 
   2233 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2234 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2235      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2236      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2237      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2238      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2239 
   2240 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2241 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2242      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2243      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2244      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2245      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2246      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2247      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2248      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2249      afterwards.
   2250 
   2251 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2252      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2253      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2254      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2255      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2256      precedence.
   2257 
   2258      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2259      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2260 
   2261 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2262      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2263      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2264      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2265      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2266      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2267      searched first.
   2268 
   2269 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2270      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2271      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2272      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2273      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2274      start of the first file.
   2275 
   2276 
   2277 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2278 
   2279 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2280 -----------------------------------------------
   2281 
   2282 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2283 
   2284 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2285 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2286      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2287      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2288      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2289      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2290      line option takes precedence.
   2291 
   2292      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2293      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2294      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2295      desired endianness.
   2296 
   2297      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2298      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2299      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2300      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2301 
   2302      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2303      uses this command:
   2304           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2305      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2306      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2307      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2308      format.
   2309 
   2310 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2311      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2312      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2313      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2314      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2315      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2316      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2317 
   2318 
   2319 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2320 
   2321 3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
   2322 ----------------------------------
   2323 
   2324 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2325 
   2326 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2327      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2328      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2329 
   2330 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2331      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2332      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2333      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2334      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2335      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2336 
   2337 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2338      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2339      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2340      output file is specified (`-r').
   2341 
   2342 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2343      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2344      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2345      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2346 
   2347 `INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
   2348      This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
   2349      augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
   2350      inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
   2351      OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
   2352      linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
   2353      sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
   2354      the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
   2355      the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
   2356      linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
   2357      default linker script statements in the internal linker
   2358      representation of the script.  In particular, input section
   2359      assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
   2360      the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
   2361      `INSERT' might look:
   2362 
   2363           SECTIONS
   2364           {
   2365             OVERLAY :
   2366             {
   2367               .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
   2368               .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
   2369             }
   2370           }
   2371           INSERT AFTER .text;
   2372 
   2373 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2374      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2375      references among certain output sections.
   2376 
   2377      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2378      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2379      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2380      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2381      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2382 
   2383      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2384      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2385      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2386      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2387      names.
   2388 
   2389 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2390      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2391      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2392      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2393      program with the `-f' option.
   2394 
   2395 
   2396 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2397 
   2398 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2399 ===============================
   2400 
   2401 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2402 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2403 
   2404 * Menu:
   2405 
   2406 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2407 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2408 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2409 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2410 
   2411 
   2412 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2413 
   2414 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2415 ------------------------
   2416 
   2417 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2418 
   2419 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2420 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2421 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2422 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2423 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2424 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2425 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2426 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2427 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2428 
   2429    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2430 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2431 adjusted accordingly.
   2432 
   2433    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2434 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2435 
   2436    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2437 
   2438    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2439 
   2440    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2441 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2442 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2443 
   2444    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2445 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2446 
   2447    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2448 assignments may be used:
   2449 
   2450      floating_point = 0;
   2451      SECTIONS
   2452      {
   2453        .text :
   2454          {
   2455            *(.text)
   2456            _etext = .;
   2457          }
   2458        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2459        .data : { *(.data) }
   2460      }
   2461    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2462 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2463 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2464 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2465 boundary.
   2466 
   2467 
   2468 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2469 
   2470 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2471 -------------
   2472 
   2473 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2474 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2475 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2476 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2477 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2478 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2479 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2480 
   2481    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2482      SECTIONS
   2483      {
   2484        .text :
   2485          {
   2486            *(.text)
   2487            _etext = .;
   2488            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2489          }
   2490      }
   2491 
   2492    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2493 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2494 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2495 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2496 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2497 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2498 
   2499 
   2500 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2501 
   2502 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2503 --------------------
   2504 
   2505 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2506 hidden and won't be exported.
   2507 
   2508 
   2509 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2510 
   2511 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2512 ---------------------------
   2513 
   2514 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2515 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2516 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2517 that does not have a value.
   2518 
   2519    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2520 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2521 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2522 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2523 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2524 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2525 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2526 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2527 
   2528        extern int foo;
   2529 
   2530    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2531 
   2532        _foo = 1000;
   2533 
   2534    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2535 transformation has taken place.
   2536 
   2537    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2538 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2539 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2540 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2541 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2542 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2543 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2544 
   2545        int foo = 1000;
   2546 
   2547    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2548 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2549 initially stored.
   2550 
   2551    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2552 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2553 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2554 So:
   2555 
   2556        foo = 1;
   2557 
   2558    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2559 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2560 address.  Whereas:
   2561 
   2562        int * a = & foo;
   2563 
   2564    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2565 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2566 variable `a'.
   2567 
   2568    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2569 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2570 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2571 definition:
   2572 
   2573        foo = 1000;
   2574 
   2575    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2576 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2577 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2578 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2579 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2580 
   2581    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2582 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2583 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2584 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2585 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2586 
   2587        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2588        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2589        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2590 
   2591    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2592 
   2593        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2594 
   2595        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2596 
   2597    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2598 
   2599 
   2600 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2601 
   2602 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2603 ====================
   2604 
   2605 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2606 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2607 
   2608    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2609      SECTIONS
   2610      {
   2611        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2612        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2613        ...
   2614      }
   2615 
   2616    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2617 
   2618    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2619 
   2620    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2621 
   2622    * an output section description
   2623 
   2624    * an overlay description
   2625 
   2626    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2627 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2628 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2629 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2630 the layout of the output file.
   2631 
   2632    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2633 below.
   2634 
   2635    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2636 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2637 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2638 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2639 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2640 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2641 
   2642 * Menu:
   2643 
   2644 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2645 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2646 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2647 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2648 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   2649 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   2650 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   2651 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   2652 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   2653 
   2654 
   2655 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2656 
   2657 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   2658 --------------------------------
   2659 
   2660 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   2661      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2662        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2663        {
   2664          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2665          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2666          ...
   2667        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2668 
   2669    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   2670 attributes.
   2671 
   2672    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   2673 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   2674 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   2675 
   2676    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   2677 
   2678    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2679 
   2680    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   2681 
   2682    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   2683 
   2684    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   2685 
   2686 
   2687 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   2688 
   2689 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   2690 -------------------------
   2691 
   2692 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   2693 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   2694 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   2695 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   2696 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   2697 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   2698 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   2699 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   2700 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   2701 
   2702    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   2703 Discarding::.
   2704 
   2705 
   2706 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2707 
   2708 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   2709 ----------------------------
   2710 
   2711 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   2712 of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
   2713 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
   2714 value of the location counter.
   2715 
   2716    If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
   2717 set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
   2718 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
   2719 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
   2720 output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
   2721 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
   2722 section.
   2723 
   2724    For example,
   2725      .text . : { *(.text) }
   2726    and
   2727      .text : { *(.text) }
   2728    are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   2729 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   2730 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   2731 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
   2732 
   2733    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   2734 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   2735 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   2736 do something like this:
   2737      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   2738    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   2739 aligned upward to the specified value.
   2740 
   2741    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   2742 location counter.
   2743 
   2744 
   2745 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   2746 
   2747 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   2748 -------------------------------
   2749 
   2750 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   2751 
   2752    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   2753 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   2754 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   2755 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   2756 
   2757 * Menu:
   2758 
   2759 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   2760 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   2761 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   2762 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   2763 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   2764 
   2765 
   2766 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2767 
   2768 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   2769 ............................
   2770 
   2771 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   2772 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   2773 
   2774    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   2775 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   2776 
   2777    The most common input section description is to include all input
   2778 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   2779 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   2780      *(.text)
   2781    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   2782 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   2783 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   2784 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   2785      *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
   2786    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   2787 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   2788 
   2789    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   2790      *(.text .rdata)
   2791      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   2792    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   2793 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   2794 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   2795 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   2796 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   2797 sections.
   2798 
   2799    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   2800 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   2801 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   2802      data.o(.data)
   2803 
   2804    You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
   2805 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
   2806 no whitespace around the colon.
   2807 
   2808 `archive:file'
   2809      matches file within archive
   2810 
   2811 `archive:'
   2812      matches the whole archive
   2813 
   2814 `:file'
   2815      matches file but not one in an archive
   2816 
   2817    Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
   2818 wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
   2819 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
   2820 is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
   2821 `c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
   2822 `EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
   2823 contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
   2824 using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
   2825 
   2826    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   2827 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   2828 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   2829      data.o
   2830 
   2831    When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
   2832 and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
   2833 see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
   2834 in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
   2835 the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
   2836 Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
   2837 not search for the file in the archive search path.
   2838 
   2839 
   2840 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   2841 
   2842 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   2843 .......................................
   2844 
   2845 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   2846 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   2847 
   2848    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   2849 pattern for the file name.
   2850 
   2851    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   2852 
   2853 `*'
   2854      matches any number of characters
   2855 
   2856 `?'
   2857      matches any single character
   2858 
   2859 `[CHARS]'
   2860      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   2861      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   2862      match any lower case letter
   2863 
   2864 `\'
   2865      quotes the following character
   2866 
   2867    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   2868 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   2869 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   2870 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   2871 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   2872 
   2873    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   2874 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   2875 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   2876 
   2877    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   2878 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   2879 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   2880 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   2881 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   2882      .data : { *(.data) }
   2883      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   2884 
   2885    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   2886 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   2887 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   2888 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   2889 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   2890 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   2891 file.
   2892 
   2893    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   2894 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   2895 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   2896 
   2897    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   2898 
   2899    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   2900 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   2901 
   2902   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2903      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   2904      if 2 sections have the same name.
   2905 
   2906   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2907      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   2908      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   2909 
   2910   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   2911      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   2912 
   2913   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   2914      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   2915      section pattern).
   2916 
   2917   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   2918 
   2919    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   2920 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   2921 precedence over the command line option.
   2922 
   2923    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   2924 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   2925 as nested sorting command.
   2926 
   2927   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   2928      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2929      (wildcard section pattern)).
   2930 
   2931   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   2932      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2933      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2934 
   2935    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   2936 command line option will be ignored.
   2937 
   2938    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   2939 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   2940 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   2941 
   2942    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   2943 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   2944 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   2945 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   2946 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   2947 `.data' section in `.data'.
   2948      SECTIONS {
   2949        .text : { *(.text) }
   2950        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   2951        .data : { *(.data) }
   2952        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2953      }
   2954 
   2955 
   2956 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2957 
   2958 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   2959 ........................................
   2960 
   2961 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   2962 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   2963 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   2964 named `COMMON'.
   2965 
   2966    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   2967 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   2968 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   2969 input files are placed in another section.
   2970 
   2971    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   2972 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   2973      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   2974 
   2975    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   2976 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   2977 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   2978 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   2979 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   2980 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   2981 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   2982 locations.
   2983 
   2984    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   2985 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   2986 
   2987 
   2988 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   2989 
   2990 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   2991 ............................................
   2992 
   2993 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   2994 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   2995 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   2996 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   2997 
   2998 
   2999 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   3000 
   3001 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   3002 .............................
   3003 
   3004 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   3005 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   3006 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   3007 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   3008 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   3009 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   3010 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   3011 are written to output section `outputc'.
   3012 
   3013      SECTIONS {
   3014        outputa 0x10000 :
   3015          {
   3016          all.o
   3017          foo.o (.input1)
   3018          }
   3019        outputb :
   3020          {
   3021          foo.o (.input2)
   3022          foo1.o (.input1)
   3023          }
   3024        outputc :
   3025          {
   3026          *(.input1)
   3027          *(.input2)
   3028          }
   3029      }
   3030 
   3031 
   3032 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   3033 
   3034 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   3035 -------------------------
   3036 
   3037 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   3038 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   3039 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   3040 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   3041 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   3042 
   3043    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   3044 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   3045 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   3046 
   3047    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   3048 value of the symbol `addr':
   3049      BYTE(1)
   3050      LONG(addr)
   3051 
   3052    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   3053 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   3054 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   3055 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   3056 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   3057 
   3058    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   3059 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   3060 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   3061 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   3062 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   3063 
   3064    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   3065 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   3066      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   3067    whereas this will work:
   3068      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   3069 
   3070    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   3071 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   3072 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   3073 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   3074 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   3075 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   3076 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   3077 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   3078 section.
   3079 
   3080    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   3081 value `0x90':
   3082      FILL(0x90909090)
   3083 
   3084    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   3085 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   3086 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   3087 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   3088 details on the fill expression.
   3089 
   3090 
   3091 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   3092 
   3093 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   3094 -----------------------------
   3095 
   3096 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   3097 commands.
   3098 
   3099 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   3100      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   3101      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   3102      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   3103      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   3104      appears.
   3105 
   3106      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   3107      normally used for any other object file format.
   3108 
   3109 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   3110      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   3111      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   3112      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   3113      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   3114      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   3115      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   3116      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   3117      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   3118      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   3119 
   3120      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   3121      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   3122      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   3123      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   3124      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   3125      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   3126      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   3127      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   3128      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   3129      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   3130      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   3131 
   3132      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   3133      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   3134      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   3135      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   3136      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   3137      runtime code expects to see.
   3138 
   3139                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3140                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3141                 *(.ctors)
   3142                 LONG(0)
   3143                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   3144                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3145                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3146                 *(.dtors)
   3147                 LONG(0)
   3148                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   3149 
   3150      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   3151      which provides some control over the order in which global
   3152      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   3153      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   3154      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   3155      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   3156      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   3157      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   3158 
   3159      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   3160      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   3161      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   3162      and writing your own linker scripts.
   3163 
   3164 
   3165 
   3166 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   3167 
   3168 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   3169 -------------------------------
   3170 
   3171 The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
   3172 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
   3173 present in any of the input files.  For example:
   3174      .foo : { *(.foo) }
   3175    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   3176 `.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
   3177 are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
   3178 an output section will also create the output section.
   3179 
   3180    The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
   3181 Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
   3182 defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
   3183 obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
   3184 section is discarded.
   3185 
   3186    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   3187 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   3188 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   3189 
   3190 
   3191 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   3192 
   3193 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   3194 -------------------------------
   3195 
   3196 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   3197 like this:
   3198      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   3199        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   3200        {
   3201          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3202          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3203          ...
   3204        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   3205 We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   3206 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   3207 section attributes.
   3208 
   3209 * Menu:
   3210 
   3211 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   3212 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   3213 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   3214 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   3215 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   3216 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   3217 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   3218 
   3219 
   3220 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3221 
   3222 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   3223 ...........................
   3224 
   3225 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3226 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3227 
   3228 `NOLOAD'
   3229      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3230      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3231 
   3232 `DSECT'
   3233 `COPY'
   3234 `INFO'
   3235 `OVERLAY'
   3236      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3237      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3238      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3239      section when the program is run.
   3240 
   3241    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3242 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3243 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3244 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3245 loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
   3246 appear in the linker output file as usual.
   3247      SECTIONS {
   3248        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3249        ...
   3250      }
   3251 
   3252 
   3253 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3254 
   3255 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3256 ..........................
   3257 
   3258 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3259 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
   3260 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
   3261 Address::).
   3262 
   3263    The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load
   3264 address of the section.
   3265 
   3266    Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
   3267 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
   3268 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
   3269 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
   3270 
   3271    If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
   3272 the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and
   3273 LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the
   3274 same region.  If there is no preceding output section or the section is
   3275 not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA.  *Note
   3276 Output Section Region::.
   3277 
   3278    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3279 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3280 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3281 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3282 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3283 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3284 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3285 
   3286      SECTIONS
   3287        {
   3288        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3289        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3290          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3291          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3292        .bss 0x3000 :
   3293          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3294      }
   3295 
   3296    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3297 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3298 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3299 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3300 linker script.
   3301 
   3302      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3303      char *src = &_etext;
   3304      char *dst = &_data;
   3305 
   3306      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
   3307      while (dst < &_edata) {
   3308        *dst++ = *src++;
   3309      }
   3310 
   3311      /* Zero bss */
   3312      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3313        *dst = 0;
   3314 
   3315 
   3316 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3317 
   3318 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3319 ...............................
   3320 
   3321 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3322 
   3323 
   3324 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3325 
   3326 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3327 ..............................
   3328 
   3329 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3330 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3331 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3332 
   3333 
   3334 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3335 
   3336 3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
   3337 .............................
   3338 
   3339 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3340 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3341 
   3342    Here is a simple example:
   3343      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3344      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3345 
   3346 
   3347 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3348 
   3349 3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
   3350 ...........................
   3351 
   3352 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3353 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3354 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3355 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3356 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3357 segment at all.
   3358 
   3359    Here is a simple example:
   3360      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3361      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3362 
   3363 
   3364 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3365 
   3366 3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
   3367 ...........................
   3368 
   3369 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3370 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3371 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3372 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3373 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3374 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3375 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3376 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3377 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3378 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3379 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3380 number is big-endian.
   3381 
   3382    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3383 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3384 
   3385    Here is a simple example:
   3386      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3387 
   3388 
   3389 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3390 
   3391 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3392 -------------------------
   3393 
   3394 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3395 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3396 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3397 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3398 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3399 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3400 than another.
   3401 
   3402    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3403 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3404 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3405      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3406        {
   3407          SECNAME1
   3408            {
   3409              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3410              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3411              ...
   3412            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3413          SECNAME2
   3414            {
   3415              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3416              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3417              ...
   3418            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3419          ...
   3420        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3421 
   3422    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3423 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3424 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3425 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3426 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3427 an `OVERLAY'.
   3428 
   3429    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3430 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3431 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3432 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3433 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3434 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3435 location counter).
   3436 
   3437    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3438 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3439 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3440 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3441 Commands.
   3442 
   3443    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3444 provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3445 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3446 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3447 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3448 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3449 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3450 
   3451    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3452 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3453 section.
   3454 
   3455    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3456 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3457        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3458         {
   3459           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3460           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3461         }
   3462 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3463 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3464 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3465 defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3466 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3467 
   3468    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3469 like the following.
   3470 
   3471        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3472        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3473                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3474 
   3475    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3476 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3477 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3478 
   3479        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3480        PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
   3481        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
   3482        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3483        PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
   3484        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
   3485        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3486 
   3487 
   3488 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3489 
   3490 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3491 ==================
   3492 
   3493 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3494 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3495 
   3496    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3497 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3498 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3499 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3500 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3501 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3502 around to fit into the available regions.
   3503 
   3504    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3505 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3506 wish.  The syntax is:
   3507      MEMORY
   3508        {
   3509          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3510          ...
   3511        }
   3512 
   3513    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3514 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3515 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3516 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3517 have a distinct name.
   3518 
   3519    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3520 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3521 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3522 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3523 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3524 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3525 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3526 
   3527    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3528 `R'
   3529      Read-only section
   3530 
   3531 `W'
   3532      Read/write section
   3533 
   3534 `X'
   3535      Executable section
   3536 
   3537 `A'
   3538      Allocatable section
   3539 
   3540 `I'
   3541      Initialized section
   3542 
   3543 `L'
   3544      Same as `I'
   3545 
   3546 `!'
   3547      Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
   3548 
   3549    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3550 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3551 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3552 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3553 
   3554    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3555 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3556 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3557 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3558 
   3559    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3560 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3561 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3562 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3563 
   3564    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3565 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3566 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3567 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3568 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3569 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3570 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3571 
   3572      MEMORY
   3573        {
   3574          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3575          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   3576        }
   3577 
   3578    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   3579 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   3580 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   3581 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   3582 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   3583 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   3584 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   3585 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   3586 will issue an error message.
   3587 
   3588    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   3589 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   3590 
   3591        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   3592 
   3593 
   3594 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   3595 
   3596 3.8 PHDRS Command
   3597 =================
   3598 
   3599 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   3600 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   3601 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   3602 program with the `-p' option.
   3603 
   3604    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   3605 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   3606 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   3607 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   3608 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   3609 
   3610    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   3611 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   3612 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   3613 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   3614 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   3615 
   3616    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   3617 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   3618 ignore `PHDRS'.
   3619 
   3620    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   3621 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   3622 
   3623      PHDRS
   3624      {
   3625        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   3626              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   3627      }
   3628 
   3629    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   3630 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   3631 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3632 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   3633 have a distinct name.
   3634 
   3635    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   3636 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   3637 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   3638 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   3639 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   3640 Phdr::.
   3641 
   3642    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   3643 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   3644 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   3645 section.
   3646 
   3647    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   3648 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   3649 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   3650 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   3651 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   3652 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   3653 
   3654    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
   3655 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
   3656 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
   3657 file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
   3658 the ELF program headers themselves.
   3659 
   3660    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   3661 value of the keyword.
   3662 
   3663 `PT_NULL' (0)
   3664      Indicates an unused program header.
   3665 
   3666 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   3667      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   3668      loaded from the file.
   3669 
   3670 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   3671      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   3672 
   3673 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   3674      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   3675      be found.
   3676 
   3677 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   3678      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   3679 
   3680 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   3681      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   3682      ELF ABI.
   3683 
   3684 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   3685      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   3686 
   3687 EXPRESSION
   3688      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   3689      may be used for types not defined above.
   3690 
   3691    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   3692 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   3693 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   3694 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   3695 section attribute.
   3696 
   3697    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   3698 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   3699 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   3700 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   3701 
   3702    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   3703 headers used on a native ELF system.
   3704 
   3705      PHDRS
   3706      {
   3707        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   3708        interp PT_INTERP ;
   3709        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   3710        data PT_LOAD ;
   3711        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   3712      }
   3713 
   3714      SECTIONS
   3715      {
   3716        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   3717        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   3718        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   3719        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   3720        ...
   3721        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   3722        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   3723        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   3724        ...
   3725      }
   3726 
   3727 
   3728 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   3729 
   3730 3.9 VERSION Command
   3731 ===================
   3732 
   3733 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   3734 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   3735 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   3736 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   3737 shared library.
   3738 
   3739    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   3740 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   3741 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   3742 
   3743    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   3744      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   3745 
   3746    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   3747 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   3748 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   3749 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   3750 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   3751 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   3752 library.
   3753 
   3754    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   3755 few examples.
   3756 
   3757      VERS_1.1 {
   3758      	 global:
   3759      		 foo1;
   3760      	 local:
   3761      		 old*;
   3762      		 original*;
   3763      		 new*;
   3764      };
   3765 
   3766      VERS_1.2 {
   3767      		 foo2;
   3768      } VERS_1.1;
   3769 
   3770      VERS_2.0 {
   3771      		 bar1; bar2;
   3772      	 extern "C++" {
   3773      		 ns::*;
   3774      		 "int f(int, double)";
   3775               }
   3776      } VERS_1.2;
   3777 
   3778    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   3779 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   3780 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   3781 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   3782 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   3783 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   3784 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   3785 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   3786 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   3787 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   3788 
   3789    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   3790 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   3791 node `VERS_1.2'.
   3792 
   3793    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   3794 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   3795 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   3796 
   3797    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   3798 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   3799 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   3800 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   3801 somewhere in the version script.
   3802 
   3803    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   3804 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   3805 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   3806 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   3807 
   3808    Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
   3809 the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   3810 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   3811 which won't.
   3812 
   3813      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   3814 
   3815    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   3816 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   3817 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   3818 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   3819 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   3820 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   3821 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   3822 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   3823 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   3824 search for each symbol reference.
   3825 
   3826    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   3827 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   3828 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   3829 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   3830 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   3831 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   3832 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   3833 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   3834 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   3835 
   3836    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   3837 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   3838 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   3839 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   3840 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   3841      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3842    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   3843 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   3844 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   3845 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   3846 version script.
   3847 
   3848    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   3849 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   3850 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   3851 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   3852 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   3853 
   3854    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   3855 file.  Here is an example:
   3856 
   3857      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   3858      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3859      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   3860      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   3861 
   3862    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   3863 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   3864 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   3865 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   3866 
   3867    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   3868 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   3869 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   3870 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   3871 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   3872 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   3873 
   3874    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   3875 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   3876 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   3877 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   3878 
   3879    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   3880 
   3881      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   3882 
   3883    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   3884 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   3885 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   3886 `version-script-commands'.
   3887 
   3888    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   3889 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   3890 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   3891 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   3892 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   3893 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   3894 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   3895 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   3896 when you upgrade.
   3897 
   3898 
   3899 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   3900 
   3901 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   3902 ==================================
   3903 
   3904 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   3905 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   3906 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   3907 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   3908 
   3909    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   3910 
   3911    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   3912 in expressions.
   3913 
   3914 * Menu:
   3915 
   3916 * Constants::			Constants
   3917 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   3918 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   3919 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   3920 * Operators::			Operators
   3921 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   3922 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   3923 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   3924 
   3925 
   3926 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3927 
   3928 3.10.1 Constants
   3929 ----------------
   3930 
   3931 All constants are integers.
   3932 
   3933    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   3934 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   3935 The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
   3936 
   3937    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   3938 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
   3939 following all refer to the same quantity:
   3940      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   3941      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   3942      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   3943 
   3944 
   3945 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   3946 
   3947 3.10.2 Symbol Names
   3948 -------------------
   3949 
   3950 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   3951 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   3952 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   3953 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   3954 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   3955      "SECTION" = 9;
   3956      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   3957 
   3958    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   3959 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   3960 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   3961 
   3962 
   3963 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3964 
   3965 3.10.3 Orphan Sections
   3966 ----------------------
   3967 
   3968 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   3969 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   3970 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   3971 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   3972 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   3973 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   3974 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   3975 then it places at the end of the file.
   3976 
   3977    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   3978 as well as section flag.
   3979 
   3980    If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
   3981 the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
   3982 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
   3983 section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
   3984 orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
   3985 representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
   3986 
   3987 
   3988 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   3989 
   3990 3.10.4 The Location Counter
   3991 ---------------------------
   3992 
   3993 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   3994 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   3995 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   3996 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   3997 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   3998 
   3999    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   4000 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   4001 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
   4002 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
   4003 creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
   4004 
   4005      SECTIONS
   4006      {
   4007        output :
   4008          {
   4009            file1(.text)
   4010            . = . + 1000;
   4011            file2(.text)
   4012            . += 1000;
   4013            file3(.text)
   4014          } = 0x12345678;
   4015      }
   4016    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   4017 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   4018 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   4019 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   4020 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   4021 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   4022 
   4023    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   4024 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   4025 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   4026 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   4027 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   4028 Thus in a script like this:
   4029 
   4030      SECTIONS
   4031      {
   4032          . = 0x100
   4033          .text: {
   4034            *(.text)
   4035            . = 0x200
   4036          }
   4037          . = 0x500
   4038          .data: {
   4039            *(.data)
   4040            . += 0x600
   4041          }
   4042      }
   4043 
   4044    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   4045 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   4046 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   4047 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   4048 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   4049 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   4050 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   4051 section itself.
   4052 
   4053    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   4054 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   4055 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   4056 
   4057      SECTIONS
   4058      {
   4059          start_of_text = . ;
   4060          .text: { *(.text) }
   4061          end_of_text = . ;
   4062 
   4063          start_of_data = . ;
   4064          .data: { *(.data) }
   4065          end_of_data = . ;
   4066      }
   4067 
   4068    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   4069 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   4070 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   4071 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   4072 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   4073 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   4074 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   4075 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   4076 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   4077 script was written as follows:
   4078 
   4079      SECTIONS
   4080      {
   4081          start_of_text = . ;
   4082          .text: { *(.text) }
   4083          end_of_text = . ;
   4084 
   4085          start_of_data = . ;
   4086          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   4087          .data: { *(.data) }
   4088          end_of_data = . ;
   4089      }
   4090 
   4091    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   4092 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   4093 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   4094 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   4095 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   4096 write:
   4097 
   4098      SECTIONS
   4099      {
   4100          start_of_text = . ;
   4101          .text: { *(.text) }
   4102          end_of_text = . ;
   4103 
   4104          . = . ;
   4105          start_of_data = . ;
   4106          .data: { *(.data) }
   4107          end_of_data = . ;
   4108      }
   4109 
   4110    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   4111 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   4112 
   4113 
   4114 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   4115 
   4116 3.10.5 Operators
   4117 ----------------
   4118 
   4119 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   4120 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   4121      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   4122      (highest)
   4123      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   4124      2               left            *  /  %
   4125      3               left            +  -
   4126      4               left            >>  <<
   4127      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   4128      6               left            &
   4129      7               left            |
   4130      8               left            &&
   4131      9               left            ||
   4132      10              right           ? :
   4133      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   4134      (lowest)
   4135    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   4136 
   4137 
   4138 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   4139 
   4140 3.10.6 Evaluation
   4141 -----------------
   4142 
   4143 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   4144 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   4145 
   4146    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   4147 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   4148 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   4149 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   4150 
   4151    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   4152 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   4153 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   4154 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   4155 
   4156    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   4157 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   4158 allocation.
   4159 
   4160    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   4161 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   4162 
   4163    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   4164 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   4165 following
   4166      SECTIONS
   4167        {
   4168          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   4169            { *(.text) }
   4170        }
   4171 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   4172 address'.
   4173 
   4174 
   4175 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   4176 
   4177 3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
   4178 -----------------------------------
   4179 
   4180 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
   4181 or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
   4182 fixed offset from the base of a section.
   4183 
   4184    The position of the expression within the linker script determines
   4185 whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
   4186 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
   4187 section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
   4188 
   4189    A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
   4190 request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
   4191 further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
   4192 section will be the section of the relative expression.
   4193 
   4194    A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
   4195 through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
   4196 will not have any particular associated section.
   4197 
   4198    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   4199 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   4200 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   4201 section `.data':
   4202      SECTIONS
   4203        {
   4204          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   4205        }
   4206    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   4207 `.data' section.
   4208 
   4209 
   4210 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   4211 
   4212 3.10.8 Builtin Functions
   4213 ------------------------
   4214 
   4215 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   4216 use in linker script expressions.
   4217 
   4218 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   4219      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   4220      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   4221      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   4222      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   4223      Section::.
   4224 
   4225 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   4226      Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
   4227      script must previously have defined the location of that section.
   4228      In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
   4229      identical values:
   4230           SECTIONS { ...
   4231             .output1 :
   4232               {
   4233               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   4234               ...
   4235               }
   4236             .output :
   4237               {
   4238               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4239               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4240               }
   4241           ... }
   4242 
   4243 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4244 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4245      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4246      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4247      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4248      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4249      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4250      ALIGN)').
   4251 
   4252      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4253      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4254      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4255      input sections:
   4256           SECTIONS { ...
   4257             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4258               *(.data)
   4259               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4260             }
   4261           ... }
   4262      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4263      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4264      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4265      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4266      value of a symbol.
   4267 
   4268      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4269 
   4270 `ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
   4271      Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
   4272      section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
   4273      when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
   4274      following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
   4275      stored as the first value in that section.
   4276           SECTIONS{ ...
   4277             .output {
   4278               LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
   4279               ...
   4280               }
   4281           ... }
   4282 
   4283 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4284      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4285      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4286      output section.
   4287 
   4288 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4289      This is equivalent to either
   4290           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4291      or
   4292           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4293      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4294      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4295      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4296      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4297      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4298      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4299 
   4300      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4301      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4302      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4303      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4304      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4305 
   4306      Example:
   4307             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4308 
   4309 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4310      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4311      evaluation purposes.
   4312 
   4313             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4314 
   4315 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4316      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4317      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4318      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4319      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4320      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4321      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4322      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4323 
   4324             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4325 
   4326 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4327      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4328      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4329      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4330      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4331      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4332      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4333      is preserved:
   4334 
   4335           SECTIONS { ...
   4336             .text : {
   4337               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4338               ...
   4339             }
   4340             ...
   4341           }
   4342 
   4343 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4344      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4345 
   4346 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4347      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
   4348      the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
   4349      is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
   4350      LMA::).
   4351 
   4352 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4353      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4354 
   4355 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4356      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4357 
   4358 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4359      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4360      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4361      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4362      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4363 
   4364 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4365      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4366 
   4367 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4368      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4369      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4370      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4371      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4372      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4373      sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4374 
   4375 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4376      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4377      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4378      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4379      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4380           SECTIONS{ ...
   4381             .output {
   4382               .start = . ;
   4383               ...
   4384               .end = . ;
   4385               }
   4386             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4387             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4388           ... }
   4389 
   4390 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4391 `sizeof_headers'
   4392      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4393      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4394      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4395      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4396 
   4397      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4398      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4399      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4400      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4401      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4402      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4403      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4404      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4405      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4406      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4407 
   4408 
   4409 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4410 
   4411 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4412 ============================
   4413 
   4414 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4415 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4416 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4417 linker will report an error.
   4418 
   4419    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4420 
   4421    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4422 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4423 
   4424    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4425 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4426 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4427 
   4428 
   4429 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4430 
   4431 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4432 ****************************
   4433 
   4434 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4435 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4436 not listed.
   4437 
   4438 * Menu:
   4439 
   4440 
   4441 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4442 
   4443 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4444 
   4445 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4446 
   4447 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4448 
   4449 * M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4450 
   4451 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4452 
   4453 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4454 
   4455 * M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4456 
   4457 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4458 
   4459 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4460 
   4461 * SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4462 
   4463 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4464 
   4465 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4466 
   4467 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4468 
   4469 
   4470 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4471 
   4472 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4473 =======================
   4474 
   4475 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4476 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4477 
   4478 _relaxing address modes_
   4479      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4480      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4481      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4482 
   4483 _synthesizing instructions_
   4484      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   4485      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4486      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   4487      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   4488      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4489 
   4490 _bit manipulation instructions_
   4491      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   4492      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   4493      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   4494      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   4495      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   4496      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   4497      page of memory).
   4498 
   4499 _system control instructions_
   4500      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
   4501      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4502      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   4503      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   4504      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4505 
   4506 
   4507 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4508 
   4509 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   4510 =================================
   4511 
   4512 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   4513 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   4514 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   4515 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   4516 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   4517 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   4518 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   4519 
   4520    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   4521 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   4522 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   4523 
   4524      try
   4525      libtry.a
   4526      tryca
   4527      libtryca.a
   4528 
   4529 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   4530 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   4531 
   4532    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   4533 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   4534 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   4535 specifies a library.
   4536 
   4537    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   4538 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   4539 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   4540 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   4541 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   4542 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   4543 not itself call any subroutines).
   4544 
   4545    The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
   4546 erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
   4547 default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
   4548 be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
   4549 unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
   4550 
   4551    The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
   4552 further details.
   4553 
   4554 
   4555 File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4556 
   4557 4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4558 ====================================================
   4559 
   4560 4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
   4561 -----------------------
   4562 
   4563 For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
   4564 when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4565 
   4566 _relaxing address modes_
   4567      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4568      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4569      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4570 
   4571      `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
   4572      transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
   4573      page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
   4574 
   4575 _relaxing gcc instruction group_
   4576      When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
   4577      instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
   4578      addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
   4579      instructions.
   4580 
   4581 
   4582 4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
   4583 ---------------------------
   4584 
   4585 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
   4586 function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
   4587 the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
   4588 instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
   4589 pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
   4590 function trampoline.
   4591 
   4592 
   4593 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4594 
   4595 4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
   4596 ===========================
   4597 
   4598 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   4599 between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   4600 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   4601 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   4602 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   4603 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   4604 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   4605 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   4606 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   4607 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   4608 
   4609    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   4610 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   4611 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   4612 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   4613 straight away.
   4614 
   4615    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   4616 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   4617 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   4618 
   4619    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   4620 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   4621 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   4622 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   4623 
   4624    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   4625 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   4626 and target defaults are as follows:
   4627 `rel'
   4628      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   4629 
   4630 `abs'
   4631      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   4632 
   4633 `got-rel'
   4634      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   4635 
   4636    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   4637 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   4638 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   4639 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   4640 objects.
   4641 
   4642    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   4643 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   4644 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   4645 
   4646    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   4647 relocations are ignored.
   4648 
   4649    Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
   4650 with a branch to the following veneer:
   4651 
   4652      TST rM, #1
   4653      MOVEQ PC, rM
   4654      BX Rn
   4655 
   4656    This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
   4657 cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
   4658 clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
   4659 rare cases.
   4660 
   4661    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   4662 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   4663 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   4664 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   4665 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   4666 
   4667    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   4668 to specify it if you are using that target.
   4669 
   4670    The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
   4671 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
   4672 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
   4673 code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
   4674 before the support code can read the intended values.
   4675 
   4676    The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
   4677 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
   4678 register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
   4679 at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
   4680 only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
   4681 workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
   4682 further details.
   4683 
   4684    If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
   4685 workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
   4686 you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
   4687 if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
   4688 The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
   4689 
   4690    If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
   4691 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
   4692 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
   4693 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
   4694 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
   4695 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
   4696 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
   4697 
   4698    The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
   4699 when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
   4700 size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
   4701 object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
   4702 enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
   4703 diagnosed.
   4704 
   4705    The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
   4706 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
   4707 `wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
   4708 linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
   4709 using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
   4710 
   4711    The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
   4712 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
   4713 PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
   4714 used to generate relocatable binaries.
   4715 
   4716    The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
   4717 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
   4718 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
   4719 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
   4720 controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
   4721 placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
   4722 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
   4723 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
   4724 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
   4725 where they should be placed.
   4726 
   4727    The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
   4728 controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
   4729 stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
   4730 positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
   4731 branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
   4732 then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
   4733 using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
   4734 smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
   4735 service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
   4736 
   4737    The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
   4738 
   4739    Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
   4740 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
   4741 otherwise.
   4742 
   4743 
   4744 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4745 
   4746 4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   4747 ====================================
   4748 
   4749 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   4750 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   4751 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   4752 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   4753 sub-spaces.
   4754 
   4755    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   4756 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   4757 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   4758 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   4759 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   4760 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   4761 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   4762 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   4763 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4764 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   4765 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   4766 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   4767 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   4768 
   4769    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4770 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   4771 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   4772 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   4773 
   4774 
   4775 File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4776 
   4777 4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4778 ====================================
   4779 
   4780 The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
   4781 choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
   4782 `target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
   4783 scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
   4784 single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
   4785 instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
   4786 negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   4787 `multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
   4788 file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
   4789 same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
   4790 different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   4791 
   4792 
   4793 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4794 
   4795 4.7 `ld' and MMIX
   4796 =================
   4797 
   4798 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   4799 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   4800 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   4801 formats.
   4802 
   4803    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   4804 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   4805 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   4806 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   4807 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   4808 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   4809 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   4810 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   4811 
   4812    Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   4813 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
   4814 default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
   4815 section.
   4816 
   4817    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   4818 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   4819 
   4820 
   4821 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4822 
   4823 4.8 `ld' and MSP430
   4824 ===================
   4825 
   4826 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   4827 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   4828 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   4829 the linker).
   4830 
   4831    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   4832 specific:
   4833 
   4834 ``.vectors''
   4835      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   4836 
   4837 ``.bootloader''
   4838      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   4839      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4840 
   4841 ``.infomem''
   4842      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   4843      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4844 
   4845 ``.infomemnobits''
   4846      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   4847      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   4848 
   4849 ``.noinit''
   4850      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   4851 
   4852      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   4853 
   4854 
   4855 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4856 
   4857 4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4858 =======================================
   4859 
   4860 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   4861 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   4862 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   4863 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   4864 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   4865 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
   4866 
   4867 `--bss-plt'
   4868      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   4869      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   4870      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   4871      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   4872      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   4873      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   4874      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   4875      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   4876 
   4877 `--secure-plt'
   4878      `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
   4879      `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
   4880      linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
   4881      layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
   4882      old style BSS PLT.
   4883 
   4884 `--sdata-got'
   4885      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   4886      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   4887      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   4888      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   4889      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   4890      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   4891      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   4892      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   4893      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   4894      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   4895      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   4896      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   4897 
   4898 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4899      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4900      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4901 
   4902 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4903      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   4904      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   4905      the optimization.
   4906 
   4907 
   4908 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4909 
   4910 4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4911 ==========================================
   4912 
   4913 `--stub-group-size'
   4914      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   4915      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   4916      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   4917      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   4918      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   4919      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   4920      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   4921      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   4922      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   4923      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4924      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   4925      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   4926      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   4927      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   4928      values of `N' respectively.
   4929 
   4930      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4931      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   4932      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   4933      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   4934      stub.
   4935 
   4936 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4937      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4938      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4939 
   4940 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   4941      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   4942      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   4943      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   4944      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   4945      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   4946      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   4947      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   4948      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   4949 
   4950 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4951      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   4952      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   4953      disable the optimization.
   4954 
   4955 `--no-opd-optimize'
   4956      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   4957      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   4958      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
   4959      Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   4960 
   4961 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   4962      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   4963      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   4964      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   4965      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   4966 
   4967 `--no-toc-optimize'
   4968      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   4969      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   4970      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   4971      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   4972      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   4973      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   4974      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   4975      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   4976      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   4977      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   4978      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   4979      disable the optimization.
   4980 
   4981 `--no-multi-toc'
   4982      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   4983      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   4984      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   4985      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   4986      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   4987      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   4988      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   4989      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   4990      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   4991 
   4992 
   4993 File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4994 
   4995 4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4996 =============================
   4997 
   4998 `--plugin'
   4999      This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
   5000 
   5001 `--no-overlays'
   5002      Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
   5003      regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
   5004      `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
   5005      off all this special overlay handling.
   5006 
   5007 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5008      This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
   5009      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5010 
   5011 `--extra-overlay-stubs'
   5012      This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
   5013      calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
   5014      calls to non-overlay regions.
   5015 
   5016 `--local-store=lo:hi'
   5017      `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
   5018      address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
   5019      range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
   5020 
   5021 `--stack-analysis'
   5022      SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
   5023      unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
   5024      under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
   5025      option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
   5026      `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
   5027      the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
   5028      stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
   5029      for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
   5030      for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
   5031      find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
   5032      recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
   5033      under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
   5034      for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
   5035      link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
   5036      stack usage and calls will be given.
   5037 
   5038 `--emit-stack-syms'
   5039      This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
   5040      `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
   5041      the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
   5042      `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
   5043      `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
   5044      the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
   5045      size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
   5046      section `SHN_ABS'.
   5047 
   5048 
   5049 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5050 
   5051 4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   5052 ================================================
   5053 
   5054 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   5055 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   5056 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   5057 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   5058 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   5059 
   5060 
   5061 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5062 
   5063 4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   5064 ==================================
   5065 
   5066 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   5067 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
   5068 command line options mentioned here.
   5069 
   5070 _import libraries_
   5071      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   5072      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   5073      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   5074      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   5075      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   5076      command line option.
   5077 
   5078 _exporting DLL symbols_
   5079      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   5080 
   5081     _using auto-export functionality_
   5082           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   5083           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   5084           line options:
   5085 
   5086              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   5087 
   5088              * -exclude-symbols
   5089 
   5090              * -exclude-libs
   5091 
   5092           If, however, `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly
   5093           on the command line, then the default auto-export behavior
   5094           will be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   5095 
   5096              * A DEF file is used.
   5097 
   5098              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   5099                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   5100 
   5101     _using a DEF file_
   5102           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   5103           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   5104           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   5105           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   5106           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   5107           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   5108 
   5109                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   5110 
   5111           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   5112           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   5113 
   5114           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   5115           `xyz.dll':
   5116 
   5117                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   5118 
   5119                EXPORTS
   5120                foo
   5121                bar
   5122                _bar = bar
   5123                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   5124                var1 DATA
   5125 
   5126           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   5127           and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
   5128           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   5129           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   5130           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   5131           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   5132           object.
   5133 
   5134           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   5135           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5136           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   5137 
   5138           When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
   5139           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
   5140           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5141           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   5142 
   5143           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   5144           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   5145           non-default base address for the image.
   5146 
   5147           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   5148           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   5149           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   5150 
   5151           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   5152 
   5153                EXPORTS
   5154                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   5155                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   5156                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
   5157 
   5158           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   5159           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   5160           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   5161           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   5162           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   5163           `<integer>' alias.
   5164 
   5165           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   5166 
   5167           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   5168           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   5169           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   5170           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   5171           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   5172           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   5173 
   5174           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   5175           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   5176           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   5177           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   5178 
   5179           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   5180           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   5181           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   5182           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   5183           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   5184           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   5185           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   5186 
   5187           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   5188           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   5189           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   5190           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   5191           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   5192           without an import library.
   5193 
   5194           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   5195           specification of other DEF file statements
   5196 
   5197           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   5198           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   5199 
   5200     _Using decorations_
   5201           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   5202           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   5203           to be exported is declared as:
   5204 
   5205                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   5206                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5207 
   5208           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   5209           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   5210           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   5211           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   5212           used.
   5213 
   5214           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   5215           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   5216           dllimport, instead:
   5217 
   5218                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   5219                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5220 
   5221           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   5222           because when included by the library itself the header must
   5223           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   5224           included by client code the header must declare them as
   5225           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   5226           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   5227           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   5228           `automatic data imports' for more information.
   5229 
   5230 _automatic data imports_
   5231      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   5232      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   5233      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   5234      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   5235      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   5236      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   5237      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   5238      decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   5239      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   5240      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   5241      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   5242      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   5243      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   5244 
   5245      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   5246      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   5247 
   5248      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   5249      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   5250 
   5251      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   5252      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   5253      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   5254      feature, described below.
   5255 
   5256      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   5257      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   5258      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   5259      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   5260      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   5261      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   5262      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   5263      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   5264      these references.
   5265 
   5266      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   5267      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   5268      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   5269      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   5270      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   5271      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   5272      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   5273      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   5274 
   5275      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   5276      explicitly enabled as needed.
   5277 
   5278 _direct linking to a dll_
   5279      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   5280      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   5281      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   5282      does the traditional import library method, especially when
   5283      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   5284      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   5285      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   5286      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   5287      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   5288      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   5289      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   5290 
   5291      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   5292      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   5293      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   5294      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   5295      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   5296 
   5297      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   5298      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   5299 
   5300           libxxx.dll.a
   5301           xxx.dll.a
   5302           libxxx.a
   5303           xxx.lib
   5304           cygxxx.dll (*)
   5305           libxxx.dll
   5306           xxx.dll
   5307 
   5308      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   5309 
   5310      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   5311      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   5312      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   5313      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   5314      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   5315 
   5316      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   5317      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   5318      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   5319      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   5320      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   5321      could coexist on the same machine.
   5322 
   5323      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   5324      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   5325      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   5326 
   5327           bin/
   5328           	cygxxx.dll
   5329           lib/
   5330           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   5331           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   5332 
   5333      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   5334      done two ways:
   5335 
   5336      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   5337           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   5338 
   5339      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   5340      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   5341      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   5342      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   5343 
   5344      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   5345      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   5346      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   5347      making the app/dll.
   5348 
   5349           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   5350 
   5351      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   5352 
   5353           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   5354 
   5355      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   5356      the following is perfectly legal
   5357 
   5358           bin/
   5359           	cygxxx-5.dll
   5360           lib/
   5361           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   5362 
   5363      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   5364      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   5365      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   5366 
   5367      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   5368      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   5369      are three reasons:
   5370 
   5371      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   5372      work with auto-imported data.
   5373 
   5374      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   5375      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   5376      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   5377      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   5378      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   5379 
   5380      3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
   5381      is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
   5382      API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
   5383      of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
   5384 
   5385      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   5386      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   5387      dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   5388      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   5389      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   5390      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   5391      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   5392 
   5393 _symbol aliasing_
   5394 
   5395     _adding additional names_
   5396           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   5397           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   5398           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   5399           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   5400           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   5401           file:
   5402 
   5403                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5404 
   5405                EXPORTS
   5406                foo
   5407                _foo = foo
   5408 
   5409           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   5410 
   5411           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   5412           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   5413 
   5414                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   5415                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   5416 
   5417           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   5418           weak symbols.
   5419 
   5420     _renaming symbols_
   5421           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   5422           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   5423           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   5424           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   5425           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   5426 
   5427                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5428 
   5429                EXPORTS
   5430                _foo = foo
   5431 
   5432           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   5433           `_foo'.
   5434 
   5435      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   5436      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   5437      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   5438      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   5439      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   5440      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   5441      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   5442      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   5443      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   5444      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   5445 
   5446 _weak externals_
   5447      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   5448      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   5449      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   5450      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   5451         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   5452           historically called lazy externals.
   5453 
   5454         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   5455           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   5456 
   5457         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   5458           implemented.
   5459      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   5460      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   5461      the symbol uses a default value.
   5462 
   5463 
   5464 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5465 
   5466 4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   5467 ===============================
   5468 
   5469 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   5470 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   5471 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   5472 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   5473 example, with the command:
   5474 
   5475      SECTIONS
   5476      {
   5477        .text : {
   5478          *(.literal .text)
   5479        }
   5480      }
   5481 
   5482 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   5483 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   5484 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   5485 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   5486 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   5487 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   5488 the files would follow.
   5489 
   5490    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   5491 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   5492 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   5493 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   5494 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   5495 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   5496 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   5497 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   5498 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   5499 `CALLN' instructions.
   5500 
   5501    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   5502 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   5503 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   5504 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   5505 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   5506 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   5507 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   5508 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   5509 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   5510 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   5511 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   5512 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   5513 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   5514 are required for correctness.
   5515 
   5516    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   5517 control the linker:
   5518 
   5519 `--no-relax'
   5520      Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
   5521      default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
   5522 
   5523 `--size-opt'
   5524      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   5525      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   5526      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   5527      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   5528      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   5529 
   5530 
   5531 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   5532 
   5533 5 BFD
   5534 *****
   5535 
   5536 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   5537 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   5538 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   5539 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   5540 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   5541 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   5542 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   5543 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   5544 your configuration.
   5545 
   5546    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   5547 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   5548 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   5549 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   5550 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   5551 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   5552 greater speed.
   5553 
   5554    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   5555 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   5556 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   5557 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   5558 
   5559 * Menu:
   5560 
   5561 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   5562 
   5563 
   5564 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   5565 
   5566 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   5567 ===================================
   5568 
   5569 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   5570 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   5571 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   5572 the object file's data structures.
   5573 
   5574    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   5575 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   5576 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   5577 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   5578 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   5579 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   5580 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   5581 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   5582 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   5583 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   5584 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   5585 convert it into the chosen output format.
   5586 
   5587 * Menu:
   5588 
   5589 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   5590 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   5591 
   5592 
   5593 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   5594 
   5595 5.1.1 Information Loss
   5596 ----------------------
   5597 
   5598 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   5599 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   5600 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   5601 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   5602 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   5603 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   5604 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   5605 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   5606 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   5607 
   5608    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   5609 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   5610 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   5611 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   5612 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   5613 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   5614 command language.
   5615 
   5616    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   5617 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   5618 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   5619 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   5620 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   5621 internal and back to external formats.
   5622 
   5623    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   5624 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   5625 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   5626 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   5627 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   5628 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   5629 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   5630 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   5631 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   5632 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   5633 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   5634 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   5635 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   5636 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   5637 
   5638 
   5639 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   5640 
   5641 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   5642 ------------------------------------------
   5643 
   5644 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   5645 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   5646 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   5647 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   5648 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   5649 conversions.  
   5650 
   5651 _files_
   5652      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   5653      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   5654      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   5655      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   5656      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   5657      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   5658      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   5659      files may be used with one another.
   5660 
   5661 _sections_
   5662      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   5663      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   5664      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   5665      data structures.
   5666 
   5667 _symbols_
   5668      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   5669      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   5670      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   5671      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   5672      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   5673      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   5674      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   5675      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   5676      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   5677      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   5678 
   5679      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   5680      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   5681      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   5682      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   5683      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   5684      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   5685      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   5686 
   5687      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   5688      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   5689      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   5690      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   5691      information will be preserved.
   5692 
   5693 _relocation level_
   5694      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   5695      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   5696      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   5697      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   5698      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   5699      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   5700      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   5701      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   5702      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   5703      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   5704      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   5705      such relocation type.
   5706 
   5707 _line numbers_
   5708      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   5709      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   5710      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   5711      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   5712      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   5713      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   5714      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   5715      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   5716      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   5717      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   5718      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   5719 
   5720 
   5721 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   5722 
   5723 6 Reporting Bugs
   5724 ****************
   5725 
   5726 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   5727 
   5728    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   5729 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   5730 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   5731 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   5732 
   5733    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   5734 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   5735 
   5736 * Menu:
   5737 
   5738 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   5739 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   5740 
   5741 
   5742 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5743 
   5744 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   5745 =========================
   5746 
   5747 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   5748 guidelines:
   5749 
   5750    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   5751      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   5752 
   5753    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   5754 
   5755    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   5756      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   5757      object files are correct.
   5758 
   5759    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   5760      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   5761 
   5762 
   5763 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5764 
   5765 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   5766 ======================
   5767 
   5768 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   5769 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   5770 contact that organization first.
   5771 
   5772    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   5773 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   5774 
   5775    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
   5776 `http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
   5777 
   5778    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   5779 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   5780 leave it out, state it!
   5781 
   5782    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   5783 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   5784 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   5785 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   5786 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   5787 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   5788 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   5789 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   5790 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   5791 and the most helpful.
   5792 
   5793    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   5794 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   5795 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   5796 
   5797    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   5798 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   5799 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   5800 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   5801 
   5802    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   5803 
   5804    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   5805      `--version' argument.
   5806 
   5807      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   5808      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   5809 
   5810    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   5811      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   5812 
   5813    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   5814      and version number.
   5815 
   5816    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   5817      "`gcc-2.7'".
   5818 
   5819    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   5820      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   5821      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   5822      from make) is sufficient.
   5823 
   5824      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   5825      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   5826 
   5827    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   5828      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   5829      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   5830      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   5831      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   5832      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   5833      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   5834      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   5835 
   5836      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   5837      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   5838      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   5839      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   5840      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   5841 
   5842    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   5843      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   5844 
   5845      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   5846      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   5847      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   5848      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   5849 
   5850      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   5851      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   5852      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
   5853      a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
   5854      copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
   5855      crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
   5856      was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
   5857      crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
   5858      observations.
   5859 
   5860    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   5861      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   5862      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   5863      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   5864      by line number.
   5865 
   5866      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   5867      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   5868      information to us.
   5869 
   5870    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   5871 
   5872    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   5873 
   5874      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   5875      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   5876      changes will not affect it.
   5877 
   5878      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   5879      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   5880      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   5881      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   5882 
   5883      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   5884      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   5885      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   5886      less time, and so on.
   5887 
   5888      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   5889      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   5890      used.
   5891 
   5892    * A patch for the bug.
   5893 
   5894      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   5895      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   5896      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   5897      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   5898      might not understand it at all.
   5899 
   5900      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   5901      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   5902      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   5903      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   5904      that the bug is fixed.
   5905 
   5906      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   5907      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   5908      test case will help us to understand.
   5909 
   5910    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   5911 
   5912      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   5913      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   5914 
   5915 
   5916 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   5917 
   5918 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   5919 **************************************
   5920 
   5921 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   5922 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   5923 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   5924 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   5925 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   5926 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   5927 described here.
   5928 
   5929    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   5930 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   5931 features to make use of them.
   5932 
   5933    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   5934 `-c' command-line option.
   5935 
   5936    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   5937 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   5938 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   5939 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   5940 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   5941 
   5942    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   5943 
   5944    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   5945 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   5946 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   5947 
   5948 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   5949 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5950      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   5951      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   5952      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   5953      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   5954      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   5955      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   5956      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   5957      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   5958 
   5959 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   5960      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   5961      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   5962 
   5963      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   5964 
   5965 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   5966      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   5967      should be a power of two.
   5968 
   5969 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   5970      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   5971      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   5972 
   5973 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   5974 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   5975      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   5976 
   5977 `END'
   5978      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   5979      compatibility.
   5980 
   5981 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   5982      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   5983      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   5984 
   5985        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   5986 
   5987        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   5988 
   5989        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   5990           `COFF'
   5991 
   5992 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   5993      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   5994      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   5995 
   5996      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   5997      with no change in its effect.
   5998 
   5999 `LOAD FILENAME'
   6000 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   6001      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   6002      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   6003      line.
   6004 
   6005 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   6006      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   6007      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   6008      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   6009 
   6010 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6011 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   6012      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   6013      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   6014      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   6015      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   6016      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   6017 
   6018 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   6019 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   6020 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   6021      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   6022      linker input files.
   6023 
   6024 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   6025 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   6026 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   6027      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   6028      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   6029      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   6030      the _first_ sets the start address.
   6031 
   6032 
   6033 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   6034 
   6035 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   6036 *****************************************
   6037 
   6038                         Version 1.1, March 2000
   6039 
   6040      Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   6041      51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
   6042 
   6043      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   6044      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   6045 
   6046 
   6047   0. PREAMBLE
   6048 
   6049      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   6050      written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
   6051      the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
   6052      modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
   6053      this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
   6054      credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
   6055      modifications made by others.
   6056 
   6057      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   6058      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   6059      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   6060      license designed for free software.
   6061 
   6062      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   6063      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   6064      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   6065      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   6066      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   6067      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   6068      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   6069      instruction or reference.
   6070 
   6071 
   6072   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   6073 
   6074      This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
   6075      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
   6076      under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
   6077      any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
   6078      and is addressed as "you."
   6079 
   6080      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   6081      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   6082      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   6083 
   6084      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
   6085      section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
   6086      relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
   6087      Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
   6088      nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
   6089      (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
   6090      mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
   6091      The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
   6092      the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
   6093      philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
   6094 
   6095      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   6096      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   6097      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   6098      License.
   6099 
   6100      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   6101      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   6102      that says that the Document is released under this License.
   6103 
   6104      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   6105      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   6106      general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
   6107      and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   6108      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   6109      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   6110      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   6111      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   6112      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
   6113      to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
   6114      Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
   6115 
   6116      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   6117      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   6118      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   6119      standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
   6120      Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
   6121      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
   6122      or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   6123      available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
   6124      processors for output purposes only.
   6125 
   6126      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   6127      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   6128      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   6129      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   6130      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   6131      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   6132 
   6133   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   6134 
   6135      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   6136      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   6137      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   6138      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   6139      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   6140      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   6141      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   6142      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   6143      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   6144      the conditions in section 3.
   6145 
   6146      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   6147      and you may publicly display copies.
   6148 
   6149   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   6150 
   6151      If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
   6152      100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
   6153      must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
   6154      all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   6155      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   6156      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   6157      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   6158      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   6159      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   6160      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   6161      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   6162      other respects.
   6163 
   6164      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   6165      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   6166      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   6167      adjacent pages.
   6168 
   6169      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   6170      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   6171      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   6172      state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
   6173      computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
   6174      of the Document, free of added material, which the general
   6175      network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
   6176      charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
   6177      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   6178      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   6179      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   6180      location until at least one year after the last time you
   6181      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   6182      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   6183 
   6184      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   6185      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   6186      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   6187      version of the Document.
   6188 
   6189   4. MODIFICATIONS
   6190 
   6191      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   6192      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   6193      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   6194      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   6195      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   6196      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   6197      things in the Modified Version:
   6198 
   6199      A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   6200      distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
   6201      versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
   6202      History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
   6203      as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
   6204      gives permission.
   6205      B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   6206      entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
   6207      Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
   6208      authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
   6209      has less than five).
   6210      C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   6211      Modified Version, as the publisher.
   6212      D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   6213      E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   6214      adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   6215      F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   6216      notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
   6217      under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
   6218      Addendum below.
   6219      G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   6220      Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   6221      license notice.
   6222      H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   6223      I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
   6224      to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
   6225        publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
   6226      If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
   6227      create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
   6228      the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
   6229      describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
   6230      sentence.
   6231      J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
   6232        public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   6233      likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
   6234      previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
   6235      "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
   6236      that was published at    least four years before the Document
   6237      itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
   6238      to gives permission.
   6239      K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   6240      preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
   6241       substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
   6242      and/or dedications given therein.
   6243      L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   6244      unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   6245      or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
   6246      M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
   6247      may not be included in the Modified Version.
   6248      N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
   6249      conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
   6250 
   6251      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   6252      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   6253      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   6254      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   6255      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   6256      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   6257      other section titles.
   6258 
   6259      You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   6260      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   6261      parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
   6262      been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
   6263      of a standard.
   6264 
   6265      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   6266      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   6267      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   6268      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   6269      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   6270      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   6271      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   6272      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   6273      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   6274      publisher that added the old one.
   6275 
   6276      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   6277      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   6278      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   6279 
   6280   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   6281 
   6282      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   6283      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   6284      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   6285      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   6286      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   6287      combined work in its license notice.
   6288 
   6289      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   6290      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   6291      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   6292      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   6293      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   6294      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   6295      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   6296      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   6297      combined work.
   6298 
   6299      In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
   6300      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   6301      entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
   6302      "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
   6303      must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
   6304 
   6305   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   6306 
   6307      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   6308      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   6309      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   6310      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   6311      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   6312      documents in all other respects.
   6313 
   6314      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   6315      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   6316      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   6317      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   6318      that document.
   6319 
   6320   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   6321 
   6322      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   6323      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   6324      a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
   6325      Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
   6326      copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
   6327      called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
   6328      other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
   6329      account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
   6330      derivative works of the Document.
   6331 
   6332      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   6333      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
   6334      quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
   6335      placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
   6336      aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
   6337      aggregate.
   6338 
   6339   8. TRANSLATION
   6340 
   6341      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   6342      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   6343      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   6344      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   6345      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   6346      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   6347      translation of this License provided that you also include the
   6348      original English version of this License.  In case of a
   6349      disagreement between the translation and the original English
   6350      version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
   6351 
   6352   9. TERMINATION
   6353 
   6354      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   6355      except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
   6356      attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
   6357      void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
   6358      License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
   6359      from you under this License will not have their licenses
   6360      terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
   6361 
   6362  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   6363 
   6364      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   6365      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   6366      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   6367      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   6368      http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
   6369 
   6370      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   6371      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   6372      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   6373      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   6374      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   6375      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   6376      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   6377      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   6378      Free Software Foundation.
   6379 
   6380 
   6381 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   6382 ====================================================
   6383 
   6384 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   6385 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   6386 notices just after the title page:
   6387 
   6388      Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   6389      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   6390      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
   6391      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   6392      with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
   6393      Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
   6394      A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
   6395      Free Documentation License."
   6396 
   6397    If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
   6398 instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
   6399 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
   6400 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
   6401 
   6402    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   6403 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   6404 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   6405 permit their use in free software.
   6406 
   6407 
   6408 File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   6409 
   6410 LD Index
   6411 ********
   6412 
   6413 [index]
   6414 * Menu:
   6415 
   6416 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   6417 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  645)
   6418 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  663)
   6419 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  685)
   6420 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1470)
   6421 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  910)
   6422 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  916)
   6423 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  106)
   6424 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  673)
   6425 * --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  207)
   6426 * --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 1815)
   6427 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1475)
   6428 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   23)
   6429 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6430 * --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1432)
   6431 * --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1432)
   6432 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  767)
   6433 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  777)
   6434 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  944)
   6435 * --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  490)
   6436 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  940)
   6437 * --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  805)
   6438 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  818)
   6439 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1622)
   6440 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1757)
   6441 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1395)
   6442 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1770)
   6443 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1485)
   6444 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  536)
   6445 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  540)
   6446 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1480)
   6447 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1628)
   6448 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6449 * --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  831)
   6450 * --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  759)
   6451 * --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  763)
   6452 * --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  756)
   6453 * --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  743)
   6454 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1391)
   6455 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  425)
   6456 * --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
   6457 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   6458 * --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6459 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
   6460 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1614)
   6461 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1637)
   6462 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1775)
   6463 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1395)
   6464 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1762)
   6465 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1485)
   6466 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  160)
   6467 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1344)
   6468 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  170)
   6469 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1527)
   6470 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1503)
   6471 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  181)
   6472 * --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   6473 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  837)
   6474 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1533)
   6475 * --filter:                              Options.            (line  228)
   6476 * --fix-cortex-a8:                       i960.               (line   39)
   6477 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   44)
   6478 * --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   57)
   6479 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  434)
   6480 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  842)
   6481 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  117)
   6482 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   6483 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  852)
   6484 * --got:                                 Options.            (line 1828)
   6485 * --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
   6486 * --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  261)
   6487 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1404)
   6488 * --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1412)
   6489 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1539)
   6490 * --help:                                Options.            (line  883)
   6491 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1546)
   6492 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  457)
   6493 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1555)
   6494 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1560)
   6495 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  320)
   6496 * --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  287)
   6497 * --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   6498 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1569)
   6499 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1574)
   6500 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1578)
   6501 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1583)
   6502 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1588)
   6503 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1592)
   6504 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  141)
   6505 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6506 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  389)
   6507 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  663)
   6508 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  685)
   6509 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  916)
   6510 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  673)
   6511 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  767)
   6512 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  789)
   6513 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  818)
   6514 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6515 * --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  106)
   6516 * --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  837)
   6517 * --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    i960.               (line   39)
   6518 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  852)
   6519 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  895)
   6520 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6521 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  403)
   6522 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6523 * --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   6524 * --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  874)
   6525 * --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6526 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6527 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
   6528 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6529 * --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 1809)
   6530 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  902)
   6531 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  935)
   6532 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  948)
   6533 * --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line  957)
   6534 * --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  113)
   6535 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line  961)
   6536 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line  965)
   6537 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6538 * --oformat:                             Options.            (line  977)
   6539 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  394)
   6540 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1605)
   6541 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1597)
   6542 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  409)
   6543 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line  990)
   6544 * --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  119)
   6545 * --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   6546 * --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  874)
   6547 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  352)
   6548 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1418)
   6549 * --relax:                               Options.            (line 1006)
   6550 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   6551 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6552 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6553 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  438)
   6554 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  481)
   6555 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
   6556 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1780)
   6557 * --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1181)
   6558 * --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6559 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1126)
   6560 * --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1138)
   6561 * --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1134)
   6562 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1142)
   6563 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1147)
   6564 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1786)
   6565 * --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   6566 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1160)
   6567 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  468)
   6568 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  472)
   6569 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6570 * --stub-group-size=N <1>:               ARM.                (line  124)
   6571 * --stub-group-size=N:                   HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6572 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1793)
   6573 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   6574 * --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1164)
   6575 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  887)
   6576 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6577 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6578 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   32)
   6579 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   6580 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  477)
   6581 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  546)
   6582 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1169)
   6583 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  503)
   6584 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  521)
   6585 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1196)
   6586 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   69)
   6587 * --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1225)
   6588 * --version:                             Options.            (line  530)
   6589 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1231)
   6590 * --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   78)
   6591 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1238)
   6592 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1306)
   6593 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1311)
   6594 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1325)
   6595 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1329)
   6596 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1336)
   6597 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1339)
   6598 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1348)
   6599 * --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1362)
   6600 * -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  105)
   6601 * -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line   98)
   6602 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  695)
   6603 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  117)
   6604 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  698)
   6605 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  708)
   6606 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1118)
   6607 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  715)
   6608 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  730)
   6609 * -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  737)
   6610 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  141)
   6611 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  698)
   6612 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  151)
   6613 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  151)
   6614 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  715)
   6615 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  151)
   6616 * -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  490)
   6617 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  698)
   6618 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  181)
   6619 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  160)
   6620 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  200)
   6621 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  203)
   6622 * -F:                                    Options.            (line  228)
   6623 * -f:                                    Options.            (line  207)
   6624 * -fini:                                 Options.            (line  252)
   6625 * -G:                                    Options.            (line  261)
   6626 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  258)
   6627 * -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  269)
   6628 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  278)
   6629 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  831)
   6630 * -init:                                 Options.            (line  281)
   6631 * -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  320)
   6632 * -lNAMESPEC:                            Options.            (line  287)
   6633 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  352)
   6634 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  342)
   6635 * -Map:                                  Options.            (line  891)
   6636 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  389)
   6637 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  394)
   6638 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  715)
   6639 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line  971)
   6640 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  415)
   6641 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  409)
   6642 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line  990)
   6643 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  425)
   6644 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1000)
   6645 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1003)
   6646 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  438)
   6647 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  457)
   6648 * -rpath:                                Options.            (line 1041)
   6649 * -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line 1063)
   6650 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  472)
   6651 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  468)
   6652 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1118)
   6653 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  269)
   6654 * -static:                               Options.            (line  715)
   6655 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  477)
   6656 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  481)
   6657 * -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1190)
   6658 * -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
   6659 * -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
   6660 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  503)
   6661 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  511)
   6662 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  530)
   6663 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  530)
   6664 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  536)
   6665 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  540)
   6666 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  555)
   6667 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  546)
   6668 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  902)
   6669 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  559)
   6670 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  910)
   6671 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6672 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   6673                                                              (line   21)
   6674 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   6675                                                              (line    6)
   6676 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   6677                                                              (line    6)
   6678 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   6679                                                              (line    6)
   6680 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   6681                                                              (line   29)
   6682 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   6683 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6684 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6685 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6686 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6687 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   6688                                                              (line    6)
   6689 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   6690 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   6691 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6692 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6693 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6694 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6695 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   6696                                                              (line    6)
   6697 * ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   6698 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6699 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   6700                                                              (line   72)
   6701 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  105)
   6702 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  287)
   6703 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   6704 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   6705 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   6706 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   6707 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
   6708 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6709                                                              (line    9)
   6710 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   6711                                                              (line    9)
   6712 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   6713 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6714 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6715 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  170)
   6716 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   6717 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   6718 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   23)
   6719 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6720 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   6721 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  200)
   6722 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  117)
   6723 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   75)
   6724 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   6725 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6726 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6727 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6728                                                              (line    6)
   6729 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   6730                                                              (line   19)
   6731 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   6732 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6733 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1238)
   6734 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   6735 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   6736 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  151)
   6737 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   6738                                                              (line   20)
   6739 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   6740                                                              (line    6)
   6741 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  141)
   6742 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   6743 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   6744                                                              (line   19)
   6745 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  511)
   6746 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   6747                                                              (line   19)
   6748 * Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          i960.               (line   39)
   6749 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6750 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   6751                                                              (line    9)
   6752 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  137)
   6753 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  777)
   6754 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   6755                                                              (line   56)
   6756 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6757 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   6758                                                              (line    6)
   6759 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   6760                                                              (line   80)
   6761 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  101)
   6762 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  107)
   6763 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1174)
   6764 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1597)
   6765 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   6766 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   6767 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   6768 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  536)
   6769 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6770 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  818)
   6771 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  218)
   6772 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   6773                                                              (line    6)
   6774 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6775 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1503)
   6776 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1628)
   6777 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6778 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
   6779 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
   6780 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  831)
   6781 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  181)
   6782 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6783 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  342)
   6784 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   6785 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   6786 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  200)
   6787 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6788 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  160)
   6789 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   6790 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6791 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   6792 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6793 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   6794 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6795 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   6796 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6797 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   6798 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6799                                                              (line   13)
   6800 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6801 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6802                                                              (line    6)
   6803 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
   6804 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   6805                                                              (line    9)
   6806 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   6807                                                              (line    6)
   6808 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6809                                                              (line   39)
   6810 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  252)
   6811 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
   6812 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6813 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   44)
   6814 * FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   57)
   6815 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   6816                                                              (line   20)
   6817 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   6818                                                              (line    6)
   6819 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   6820                                                              (line    6)
   6821 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  434)
   6822 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   6823 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   6824 * garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line  852)
   6825 * garbage collection:                    Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6826 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  415)
   6827 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   6828 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   6829 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
   6830 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
   6831 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  645)
   6832 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   6833 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   6834 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1539)
   6835 * help:                                  Options.            (line  883)
   6836 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   6837 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   6838                                                              (line   39)
   6839 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6840 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6841 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   6842 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1546)
   6843 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   6844                                                              (line    6)
   6845 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   6846 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   6847 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   6848 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1348)
   6849 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  278)
   6850 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   6851                                                              (line   25)
   6852 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  281)
   6853 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   6854 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6855 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   6856                                                              (line    9)
   6857 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
   6858 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  477)
   6859 * input format:                          Options.            (line  117)
   6860 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
   6861 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   6862                                                              (line    6)
   6863 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   6864                                                              (line    6)
   6865 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   6866                                                              (line    6)
   6867 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   6868 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
   6869 * INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6870                                                              (line   30)
   6871 * insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
   6872                                                              (line   30)
   6873 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   6874 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   12)
   6875 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6876 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   6877 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6878 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6879 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6880 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6881 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6882 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   6883 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6884 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6885 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  135)
   6886 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   6887 * link map:                              Options.            (line  352)
   6888 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1063)
   6889 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6890 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   6891                                                              (line    6)
   6892 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6893 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   6894 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   6895 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
   6896 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   6897 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   6898 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   6899 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  203)
   6900 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   6901 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6902 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   6903 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   6904                                                              (line   22)
   6905 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  540)
   6906 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6907 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6908                                                              (line    6)
   6909 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6910 * M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
   6911 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6912                                                              (line   72)
   6913 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   6914 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   6915 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   6916 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6917 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   32)
   6918 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6919 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   6920                                                              (line    6)
   6921 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  895)
   6922 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   6923 * Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
   6924 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   6925 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   6926 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   6927 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   6928                                                              (line    6)
   6929 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   6930 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  409)
   6931 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   6932 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  389)
   6933 * NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  106)
   6934 * NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  113)
   6935 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   6936                                                              (line   56)
   6937 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   6938                                                              (line   22)
   6939 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   6940 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6941 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   6942 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   6943 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   6944 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   6945 * object size:                           Options.            (line  261)
   6946 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  394)
   6947 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   6948 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   6949 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   6950 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   6951 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6952 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6953 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
   6954 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   6955 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line  965)
   6956 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6957 * output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
   6958 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   6959                                                              (line    6)
   6960 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   6961                                                              (line    6)
   6962 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   6963                                                              (line    6)
   6964 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
   6965 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6966                                                              (line   72)
   6967 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6968 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   6969                                                              (line    6)
   6970 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   6971                                                              (line    6)
   6972 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  438)
   6973 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6974 * PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  119)
   6975 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line  992)
   6976 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6977 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
   6978 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6979 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6980 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
   6981 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
   6982 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6983 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6984 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6985 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6986 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6987 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6988 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6989 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6990 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6991 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   6992 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   6993                                                              (line   22)
   6994 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6995 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   6996                                                              (line    6)
   6997 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   6998 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6999 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   7000 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   7001 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   7002 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7003                                                              (line    6)
   7004 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   7005 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  389)
   7006 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  394)
   7007 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7008 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   7009 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1006)
   7010 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   7011 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   7012 * relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
   7013 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   7014 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7015 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  438)
   7016 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   7017                                                              (line    6)
   7018 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7019 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   7020 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  425)
   7021 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1027)
   7022 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   7023 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7024 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7025 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  269)
   7026 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1041)
   7027 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  196)
   7028 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   12)
   7029 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   7030                                                              (line   20)
   7031 * script files:                          Options.            (line  490)
   7032 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   7033 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  320)
   7034 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
   7035 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
   7036 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   7037 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   7038                                                              (line    6)
   7039 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7040 * section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   7041 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1329)
   7042 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   7043                                                              (line    6)
   7044 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   7045                                                              (line    6)
   7046 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7047 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   7048 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   7049                                                              (line    6)
   7050 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   7051                                                              (line    6)
   7052 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7053 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   7054                                                              (line    6)
   7055 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   7056                                                              (line    6)
   7057 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   7058 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   7059                                                              (line    6)
   7060 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1190)
   7061 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
   7062 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7063 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1120)
   7064 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7065                                                              (line    6)
   7066 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7067 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7068 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   7069                                                              (line   20)
   7070 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   7071                                                              (line   58)
   7072 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   7073                                                              (line   54)
   7074 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   7075                                                              (line   46)
   7076 * SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   7077 * SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7078 * SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   7079 * SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   7080 * SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   7081 * SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   7082 * SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7083 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7084                                                              (line    6)
   7085 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1786)
   7086 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   7087 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7088 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
   7089 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  468)
   7090 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  472)
   7091 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1027)
   7092 * STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  124)
   7093 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   7094                                                              (line    6)
   7095 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   12)
   7096 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   7097 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   7098 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   7099 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  546)
   7100 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   7101 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  457)
   7102 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  805)
   7103 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   7104 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1027)
   7105 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1006)
   7106 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   7107 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7108 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   27)
   7109 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   7110 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   7111 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   7112 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1169)
   7113 * trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7114 * trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7115 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7116 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  503)
   7117 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   7118                                                              (line   13)
   7119 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1325)
   7120 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   7121                                                              (line    6)
   7122 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   7123                                                              (line   39)
   7124 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  883)
   7125 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   69)
   7126 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   42)
   7127 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   7128 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  141)
   7129 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   7130 * verbose:                               Options.            (line 1225)
   7131 * version:                               Options.            (line  530)
   7132 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   7133 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1231)
   7134 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   7135 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   7136 * VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   78)
   7137 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1238)
   7138 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1329)
   7139 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1325)
   7140 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  386)
   7141 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   7142 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7143                                                              (line    6)
   7144 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   7145 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   7146 
   7147 
   7148 
   7149 Tag Table:
   7150 Node: Top824
   7151 Node: Overview1595
   7152 Node: Invocation2709
   7153 Node: Options3117
   7154 Node: Environment85582
   7155 Node: Scripts87342
   7156 Node: Basic Script Concepts89076
   7157 Node: Script Format91783
   7158 Node: Simple Example92646
   7159 Node: Simple Commands95742
   7160 Node: Entry Point96193
   7161 Node: File Commands96952
   7162 Node: Format Commands100953
   7163 Node: Miscellaneous Commands102919
   7164 Node: Assignments106298
   7165 Node: Simple Assignments106789
   7166 Node: PROVIDE108525
   7167 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN109730
   7168 Node: Source Code Reference109974
   7169 Node: SECTIONS113554
   7170 Node: Output Section Description115445
   7171 Node: Output Section Name116498
   7172 Node: Output Section Address117374
   7173 Node: Input Section119023
   7174 Node: Input Section Basics119824
   7175 Node: Input Section Wildcards123042
   7176 Node: Input Section Common127775
   7177 Node: Input Section Keep129257
   7178 Node: Input Section Example129747
   7179 Node: Output Section Data130715
   7180 Node: Output Section Keywords133492
   7181 Node: Output Section Discarding137061
   7182 Node: Output Section Attributes138242
   7183 Node: Output Section Type139246
   7184 Node: Output Section LMA140400
   7185 Node: Forced Output Alignment142913
   7186 Node: Forced Input Alignment143181
   7187 Node: Output Section Region143566
   7188 Node: Output Section Phdr143996
   7189 Node: Output Section Fill144660
   7190 Node: Overlay Description145802
   7191 Node: MEMORY150105
   7192 Node: PHDRS154305
   7193 Node: VERSION159344
   7194 Node: Expressions167136
   7195 Node: Constants168014
   7196 Node: Symbols168575
   7197 Node: Orphan Sections169313
   7198 Node: Location Counter170477
   7199 Node: Operators174913
   7200 Node: Evaluation175835
   7201 Node: Expression Section177199
   7202 Node: Builtin Functions178688
   7203 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts186655
   7204 Node: Machine Dependent187430
   7205 Node: H8/300188446
   7206 Node: i960190071
   7207 Node: M68HC11/68HC12192172
   7208 Node: ARM193626
   7209 Node: HPPA ELF32200875
   7210 Node: M68K202498
   7211 Node: MMIX203407
   7212 Node: MSP430204572
   7213 Node: PowerPC ELF32205621
   7214 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64208235
   7215 Node: SPU ELF212651
   7216 Node: TI COFF215283
   7217 Node: WIN32215809
   7218 Node: Xtensa234166
   7219 Node: BFD237288
   7220 Node: BFD outline238743
   7221 Node: BFD information loss240029
   7222 Node: Canonical format242546
   7223 Node: Reporting Bugs246903
   7224 Node: Bug Criteria247597
   7225 Node: Bug Reporting248296
   7226 Node: MRI255335
   7227 Node: GNU Free Documentation License259978
   7228 Node: LD Index279695
   7229 
   7230 End Tag Table
   7231